Biodiversity and Conservation Class 12 Important Extra Questions Biology Chapter 15

Here we are providing Class 12 Biology Important Extra Questions and Answers Chapter 15 Biodiversity and Conservation. Important Questions for Class 12 Biology are the best resource for students which helps in Class 12 board exams.

Class 12 Biology Chapter 15 Important Extra Questions Biodiversity and Conservation

Biodiversity and Conservation Important Extra Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
Define biodiversity.
Answer:
It refers to the totality of genes, species, and ecosystem of a region, e.g. Forest.

Question 2.
Is biodiversity the same from place to place?
Answer:
No, it differs from one place to another place.

Question 3.
What is the advantage of genetically uniform crop plants?
Answer:
The monoculture of crop plants will give a high yield.

Question 4.
What is the disadvantage of genetically uniform crop plants?
Answer:
Such crop plants are highly prone to diseases.

Question 5.
What is the total number of species discovered and described presently on earth? What is the predicted number?
Answer:
1.7 million and 50 million, respectively.

Question 6.
What are the characteristics that make a community stable?
Answer:
The stability of an ecosystem is controlled by:

  1. Carrying capacity,
  2. Recycling of wastes,
  3. Density-related self-regulation and
  4. Feedback system.

Question 7.
What accounts for the greater ecological diversity of India?
Answer:
India has high ecological diversity due to a variety of topography, soil types, climates, rainfall zones, sea coasts, islands, etc. Ten well-demarcated biogeographical zones with different biota occur in India.

Question 8.
What is the difference between endemic and exotic species?
Answer:
Endemic species belong to a local area and are of limited distribution due to biotic and abiotic regulations, e.g. Lion Tailed Macaque.

Exotic species enter from outside with under distribution due to non-control of biotic and abiotic factors. They face little resistance by endemic species, e.g. Eucalyptus.

Question 9.
How does species diversity differ from ecological diversity?
Answer:
Species diversity is the occurrence of variety and abundance of species in a community while ecological diversity is the occurrence of different ecosystems and communities in a geographical area.

Question 10.
Why is genetic variation important in the plant Rauwolfia vomitoria?
Answer:
It results in differences in the potency and concentration of drug reserpine in the plant Rauwolfia vomitoria found in different regions of the Himalayas.

Question 11.
What is the advantage to a species having more genetic diversity?
Answer:
It enables the species to adjust and adapt to changed environmental conditions.

Question 12.
What are the consequences of lower genetic diversity?
Answer:
Lower genetic diversity leads to uniformity.

Question 13.
Coin a term for the following:
(i) Within community diversity
Answer:
Alpha diversity.

(ii) Between community diversity.
Answer:
Beta diversity.

Question 14.
What is the approximate drop of temperature with a corresponding increase/decrease of about 1000 m in altitude?
Answer:
There is about a 6.5° drop in temperature.

Question 15.
What is the cause of mortality of ducks, swans, and cranes?
Answer:
Lead poisoning as they take in spent gunshots that fall into lakes and marshes.

Question 16.
List two uses of the Red List.
Answer:

  1. Developing awareness about the importance of threatened biodiversity.
  2. Identification and documentation of endangered species.

Question 17.
The red list contains an assessment of how many species?
Answer:
18,000 species out of which 11,000 are threatened.

Question 18.
What could have triggered mass extinctions of species in the past?
Answer:
Glaciation, melting of snow, the eruption of large volcanoes, earthquakes, movement of continents, large meteorites falling on the earth, drought, etc. could have triggered mass extinctions.

Question 19.
What does ‘red’ indicate in the IUCN red list (2004)?
Answer:
‘Red’ in IUCN red list (2004) indicates the threatened species, i.e. the species under varying degrees of extinction risk categories.

Question 20.
What is the importance of cryopreservation in the conservation of biodiversity? (CBSE (Delhi) 2015)
Answer:
It serves the purpose of ex situ conservation.

Question 21.
Name the type of biodiversity represented by the following:
(a) 50,000 different strains of rice in India.
Answer:
Genetic diversity

(b) Estuaries and alpine meadows in India. (CBSE (Delhi) 2013)
Answer:
Ecological diversity.

Question 22.
Write the basis on which an organism occupies a space in its community-natural surrounding. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2013)
Answer:
Alexander von Humboldt observed that within a region species richness increased with increasing explored area up to a limit.

Question 23.
Mention the kind of biodiversity of more than a thousand varieties of mangoes in India. How is it possible? (CBSE (Delhi) 2015)
Answer:

  1. Genetic diversity
  2. (a) It is the measure of variation in genetic information contained in the organism.
    (b) It enables a population to adapt to the environment.

Biodiversity and Conservation Important Extra Questions Short Answer Type

Question 1.
What will be the consequences of the loss of biodiversity?
Answer:
Consequences of loss of biodiversity:

  1. It would check the evolutionary capability of biota to cope up with environmental changes.
  2. It would result in the extinction of species.
  3. As man is dependant on food and other necessities, its loss will be hard-pressed for mankind.

Question 2.
What are the causes of the loss of biodiversity?
Answer:
Biological diversity is lost before its size is known. Causes of the toss of biodiversity:

  1. Increased human population.
  2. Increased consumption of resources.
  3. Pollution due to human activities.

Question 3.
How many genes are present in mycoplasma, E. coli, Drosophila, Oryza sativa, and Homo sapiens?
Answer:

Name of organism Number of genes
1. Mycoplasma 450-700
2.E.coli 3,200
3. Drosophila 13,000
4. Oryza sativa 32,000-50,000
5. Homo sapiens 31,000.

Question 4.
List three levels of biodiversity.
Answer:
Biodiversity can be studied at the following levels:

  1. Genetic diversity
  2. Species diversity
  3. Ecological/Ecosystem diversity.

Question 5.
What is the basis of speciation?
Answer:
Basis of speciation. The amount of genetic variation is the basis of speciation (evolution of new species). It has a key role in the maintenance of diversity at species and community levels. The total genetic diversity of a community will be greater if there are many species, as compared to a situation where there are only a few species.

Genetic diversity within a species often increases with environmental variability.

Question 6.
Write a note on ecological diversity.
Answer:
Ecological diversity. It is related to species diversity and genetic diversity. India has a greater ecosystem diversity than a Scandinavian country. India has several ecosystems/biomes like alpine meadows, rain forests, deserts, wetlands, mangroves, coral reefs, etc.

Question 7.
List the Natural World Heritage sites of India.
Answer:
Natural World Heritage sites of India:

Site Location
Kaziranga National Park Assam
Keoladeo Ghana National Park Rajasthan
Manas Wildlife Sanctuary Assam
Nanda Devi National Park Punjab
Sundarban National Park West Bengal.

Question 8.
Depict with the help of simple sketches the representation of global biodiversity of major taxa of plants, invertebrates, and vertebrates. (CBSE 2009)
Answer:
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 15 Biodiversity and Conservation 1
Representation of global biodiversity of major taxa of plants, invertebrates, and vertebrates

Question 9.
Elaborate how invasion by an alien species reduces the diversity of an area.
Answer:
This may be due to any of the following reasons:

  1. Fast-growing species may compete with less vigorous local species.
  2. Alien species will proliferate in that area if their natural pests and predators are not present.
  3. By amensalism, i.e. it may harm local species by producing chemicals.
  4. Such species may grow vigorously and may form conditions unfavorable for the growth of local native species like Eichhornia.

Question 10.
Broadly classify the extinction processes.
Answer:
Classification of extinction processes:

  1. Natural extinction: It is due to a change in environmental conditions. It is at a very slow rate.
  2. Mass extinction: Mass extinction occurs due to catastrophes. In this case, a large number of species became extinct in millions of years.
  3. Anthropogenic extinction: Extinction of species is due to man’s activities. It is occurring in a short period of time.

Question 11.
What is an endangered species? Give an example of an endangered plant and animal species each.
Answer:
An endangered species is a population of organisms, which is facing a high risk of becoming extinct because

  • Its number is very low.
  • It is threatened by changing environment.
  • It is facing a predator threat. Endangered plant species-Venus fly trap Endangered animal species-Siberian tiger.

Question 12.
List the benefits of protected areas for the conservation of biodiversity.
Answer:
Benefits of protected areas:

  1. Maintaining viable populations of all native species and subspecies.
  2. Maintaining the number and distribution of communities and habitats, and conserving the genetic diversity of all the present species.
  3. Preventing the human-caused introduction of alien species.
  4. Making it possible for species/ habitats to shift in response to changes in the environment.

Question 13.
List the biosphere reserves of India.
Answer:
Biosphere reserves of India:

  1. Nanda Devi
  2. Nokrek
  3. Manas
  4. Dibru Saikhowa
  5. Dean Debang
  6. Sunderbans
  7. Gulf of Mannar
  8. Nilgiri
  9. Great Nicobar
  10. Simitipal
  11. Ichanghendzonga
  12. Pachmarhi
  13. Agasthyamatai

Question 14.
Write a note on sacred forests.
Answer:
Sacred forests: These are forest patches protected by tribal communities in India and other Asian countries due to religious belief. These are undisturbed forests having no human intervention and frequently surrounded by highly degraded landscapes. Such forests are located in many states of India and have a number of rare, endangered, and endemic species. Likewise, Khecheopalri which contains several aquatic fauna and flora is declared as a sacred lake in Sikkim.

Question 15.
Differentiate between in situ and ex situ conservation. (CBSE Delhi 2011, Sample Paper 2020)
Answer:
Differences between in situ conservation and ex situ conservation:

In situ Conservation Ex-situ Conservation
1. It is the conservation of endangered species in their natural habitat. 1. It is the conservation of endangered species outside their natural habitat.
2. Protection from predators is ensured. 2. Protection from all adverse factors is ensured.
3. The population recovers in its natural habitat. 3. Offsprings produced in captive breeding are released in natural habitats for acclimatization.

Question 16.
(i) Explain the ‘Ex situ’ conservation of Biodiversity. How is the In situ conservation different from it? (CBSE Delhi 2018 C)
Answer:

  • It is the conservation of endangered species outside their natural habitat.
  • Protection from all adverse factors is ensured.
  • Offsprings produced in captive breeding are released in natural habitats for acclimatization.

(ii) Which one of the two in situ or ex situ biodiversity conservation measures helps the larger number of species to survive? Explain. (Outside Delhi 2019)
Answer:

  1. In situ, biodiversity conservation measures will help the larger number of species to survive.
  2. In situ is onsite conservation, i.e. it is the conservation of endangered species in their natural habitat. Whereas ex situ conservation is the conservation of endangered species outside their natural habitat.
  3. To conserve species in their natural habitat, the entire ecosystem has to be conserved including all the biotic and abiotic components of the ecosystem that are associated with the target species.
  4. In situ conservation helps in the restoration of degraded ecosystems and habitats that are means of conserving genetic resources species ecosystems and landscapes, without uprooting the local people.

Question 17.
Compare the ecological biodiversity existing in India and Norway. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2019)
Answer:
At the ecosystem level, India is far more diverse than the Scandinavian country Norway with its deserts, rain forests, mangroves, coral reefs, wetlands, estuaries, and alpine meadows.

Question 18.
What are Ramsar sites?
Answer:
Ramsar sites are wetlands spread over a wide area. These sites support a wide range of flora and fauna. There are about 25 Ramsar sites in India. Conservation of wetland is the main mission. World wetland day is observed on 2nd February.

Question 19.
Among the ecosystem services are control of floods and soil erosion. How is this achieved by the biotic components of the ecosystem?
Answer:

  1. Earth’s rich biodiversity is vital for indirect benefits like control of floods and soil erosion. Species richness checks soil erosion by binding the soil particles thereby reducing the rate of water velocity, hence reducing the chances of floods.
  2. The roots of plants make the soil porous.

Question 20.
The species diversity of plants at 22% is much less than that of animals. What could be the explanation of how animals achieved greater diversification?
Answer:

  1. Since plants cannot move from their predators and harsh treatment of environmental conditions, thus have become extinct.
  2. As the animals can move away from such conditions, the evolution of favorable characters has taken place in them.

Question 21.
Suggest two practices giving one example of each that helps protects rare or threatened species. (CBSE 2017)
Answer:

  1. By using the cryopreservation (preservation at -196°C) technique, sperms, eggs, tissues, and embryos can be stored for long period in gene banks, seed banks, etc.
  2. Plants are propagated in vitro using tissue culture methods.

Question 22.
Pollen banks are playing a very important role in promoting plant breeding programs the world over. How are pollens preserved in the pollen banks? Explain. How are such banks benefitting our farmers? Write any two ways. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Preservation of pollen is done in the pollen banks: Pollen grains of a large number of species can be preserved for years in liquid nitrogen at a temperature of -196°C. It is called cryopreservation. Pollen remains viable for a very long duration.

It helps to conserve a large number of species. It can prevent the complete extinction of many species and help to maintain biodiversity.

Question 23.
What is cryopreservation? Mention how it is used in the conversation of biodiversity. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Cryopreservation or cryo conservation is a process where organelles, cells, tissues, extracellular matrix, organs, or any other biological structures are preserved by cooling to very low temperatures, i.e. 196°C in liquid nitrogen.

Role in the conservation of biodiversity: It is an ex-situ method of conservation of biodiversity. Gametes of threatened species are preserved in viable and fertile conditions for long period. They can be used as and when required.

Biodiversity and Conservation Important Extra Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
What is biodiversity? Why has it become important recently?
Answer:
Biodiversity: The term biodiversity was coined by W.G. Rosen in 1985. It is the occurrence of different kinds of organisms and the complete range of varieties adapted to different climates, environments, and areas being constituents of food chains and food webs of biotic interrelationships. Biodiversity refers to the totality of genes, species, and ecosystems of a region. Biodiversity differs from place to place.

Significance of biodiversity: As there is a continuous loss of biodiversity due to increasing population, resource consumption, urbanization, and pollution, it is important to conserve it. The basic reason for concern is that biodiversity is being lost even before it attains its size. Loss of biodiversity would check the evolutionary capability of biota to cope up with an environmental loss.

Question 2.
Explain what is meant by species diversity? (CBSE 2010)
Answer:
Species diversity. The diversity includes the whole range of organisms found on earth. The number of identified species worldwide is between 1.7 and 1.8 million. However, the estimates of total known species maybe 50 million. A large number of plant and animal species are yet to be identified. There are many more species present in the tropics.

The two important measures of species diversity are:

  1. Species richness: It refers to the number of species per unit area.
  2. Species evenness: It refers to the relative abundance with which each species is represented in an area.
  3. The variety and number of individuals determine the level of diversity of an ecosystem.
  4. The Western Ghats have a greater diversity of amphibian species than the Eastern Ghats.

Question 3.
What is genetic diversity? Explain. (CBSE 2010)
Answer:
Genetic diversity:

  1. The greater the genetic diversity among organisms of a species, the more sustenance it has against environmental perturbations. The genetically uniform populations are highly prone to diseases and harsh environments.
  2. The genetic variation shown by Rauwolfia can be in terms of the concentration and potency of the chemical reserpine.
    There are more than 50,000 genetically different strains of rice and 1,000 varieties of mango in India.

Question 4.
Describe the ecological role of biodiversity.
Answer:
The ecological role of biodiversity:

  1. Biodiversity provides plant pollinators, predators, decomposers and contributes to soil fertility.
  2. It helps in the purification of air and water, management of flood, drought, and other environmental disasters,
  3. Ecosystems with more diversity can withstand the environmental challenges better because genetically diverse species present in the ecosystem will have different tolerance ranges for a given environmental stress, hence they cannot be easily eliminated by any single stress at a time. However, if the ecosystem contains only a few species, it will become a fragile or unstable ecosystem.
  4. The species with high genetic diversity and the ecosystems with high biodiversity have a greater capacity for adaptation against environmental perturbations.

Question 5.
Write a short note on three perspectives of community and ecosystem level of diversity.
Answer:
The three perspectives of diversity at the level of community and ecosystem are:

  1. Alpha diversity
  2. Beta diversity and
  3. Gamma diversity.

1. Alpha diversity: It refers to the diversity of organisms sharing the same community. It has been found that there is an increase in diversity with a decrease in latitude.

2. Beta diversity: The rate of replacement of species along a gradient of habitat or communities is called beta diversity.

3. Gamma diversity: It is the rate at which additional species are found as a replacement in different localities of the same habitat.

Question 6.
Give an account of global biodiversity.
Answer:
Global biodiversity:
1. According to IUCN (2004), the total number of plant and animal species described is about 1.5 million. The species inventories for taxonomic groups in temperate countries/ regions are more complete than those in tropical countries/regions.

2. A more conservative and scientifically sound estimate has been made by Robert May; it puts the global species diversity at about seven million. More than 70% of all the species recorded are animals and plants account for about 22%; 70% of the animals are insects.

These estimates do not give any figure for prokaryotes for the following reasons:

  • The conventional taxonomic methods are not suitable/sufficient for identifying these microbial species,
  • Many of these species cannot be cultured under laboratory conditions.
  • Biochemical and molecular biology techniques would put their diversity into millions.

Question 7.
Describe the species-area relationship.
Answer:
Species-Area relationship
Alexander Von Humboldt has observed that within a region, species richness increased with the increased explored area, but only up to a limit.

The relationship between species richness and area for a number of taxa like angiosperms plants, freshwater fishes, and birds is found to be a rectangular hyperbola.

On a log scale, the relationship becomes linear (straight line) and is described by the equation.Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 15 Biodiversity and Conservation 2
Species area relationship

log S = log C + Z log A, where,
S = Species Richness
Z = Slope of the line (regression coefficient)
A = area and
C = y-intercept Ecologists have found out that the value of the Z-line ranges between 0.1 and 0.2 irrespective of the taxonomic group or the region.

But this analysis in very large areas like a continent, the Z value ranges between 0.6 and 1.2. The Z value for frugivorous birds and mammals in the tropical forests is found to be 1.15.

Question 8.
What kinds of threats to biodiversity may lead to its loss?
Answer:
Threats to biodiversity:

  1. Habitat loss. In order to utilize the resources there occurs the destruction of habitat.
  2. Disturbance and pollution. A large number of organisms are destroyed due to natural disturbances such as fire, tree fall, defoliation by insects. Man’s activities are causing pollution.
  3. Introduction of exotic species. The introduction of new species into an area causes disturbances that may lead to the disappearance of native species.
  4. The extinction of species is a natural process.

Question 9.
Give a brief account of the loss of biodiversity at the global level.
Answer:
The colonization of the tropical Pacific Islands by human beings has led to the extinction of more than two thousand species of native birds.

IUCN red list (2004) documents the extinction of 784 species in the last 500 years that include 359 invertebrates, 338 vertebrates, and 87 plants.

Some of the animals that have become extinct in recent times are given below:

  1. Steller’s sea cow (Russia)
  2. Dodo (Mauritius)
  3. Thylacine (Australia)
  4. Quagga (Africa)
  5. Three subspecies (Bali, Javan, Caspian) of the tiger.
  6. 27 species have become extinct in the last twenty years alone.
  7. Amphibians are more vulnerable to extinction.

Though about 15,5000 species are facing extinction, at present following the face the threat of extinction:

  • 31% of gymnosperms
  • 32% of amphibians
  • 12% of bird species
  • 23% of mammals

Since the origin of life on earth and evolution, three have been five episodes of mass extinction, but the current rate of extinction is 100-1000 times faster than them, due to human activities.

Question 10.
Write an explanatory note on the efforts for the conservation of biodiversity in India.
Answer:
Conservation of biodiversity in India:

  1. In situ conservation is carried out through biosphere reserves, national parks and wildlife sanctuaries, and other protected areas by the Ministry of Environment and Forest reserve.
  2. The National Bureau of Plants, Animals, and Fish Genetic Resources collects, conserves and stores germplasms of plants and animals in seed gene banks or field gene banks.
  3. Botanical Gardens and Zoological Parks have a large collection of plant and animal species.

Question 11.
Explain the following:
(a) IUCN Red List
Answer:
IUCN Red List: It is a catalog of taxa that are facing the risk of extinction.

The uses of the red list are:

  • developing awareness about the threat of loss of biodiversity
  • identification and documentation of endangered species
  • providing a global index of the decline of biodiversity
  • defining conservation.

IUCN has recognized eight red list categories of species.
They are:

  1. Extinct
  2. Extinct in wild
  3. Critically endangered
  4. Endangered
  5. Vulnerable
  6. Lower risk
  7. Data deficient and
  8. Not evaluated.

The 2000 red list contains an assessment of more than 18,000 species, 11,000 of which are threatened.

(b) Protected areas.
Answer:
Protected areas: These areas are land or sea and are dedicated to the protection and maintenance of biological diversity. They include National Parks, Sanctuaries, and Biosphere reserves. As of September 2002, India has 581 protected areas.

National parks: A national park is an area that is strictly reserved for the betterment of the wildlife and where activities like forestry, grazing, or cultivation are not permitted. In these parks, even private ownership rights are not allowed. Sanctuaries. A sanctuary is a protected area that is reserved for the conservation of only animals and human activities like harvesting of timber, collection of minor forest products and private ownership is allowed so long as they do not interfere with the well-being of animals.

A biosphere reserve is a specified area in which multiple uses of the land are permitted by dividing it into certain zones, each zone is specified for a particular activity.

Question 12.
What is a biosphere reserve? Show the zonation of the biosphere reserve.
Answer:
Biosphere Reserves. Biosphere reserves are a special category of protected areas of land and/or coastal environments, wherein people are an integral component of the system. These are representative examples of natural biomes and contain unique biological communities.
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 15 Biodiversity and Conservation 3
The zonation in a terrestrial Biosphere Reserve

Question 13.
Show the in situ and ex situ approaches of conserving biodiversity in India.
Answer:
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 15 Biodiversity and Conservation 4
The In situ and ex situ approaches of conserving biodiversity in India.

Question 14.
Write critical notes on the following:
1. Hot spots of biodiversity.
2. Ex-situ conservation.
3. India’s effort in biodiversity. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Or
States any two criteria for determines biodiversity hotspots. Name any two hotspots of India. (CBSE Sample Paper 2020)
Answer:
1. Hot spots of biodiversity: The concept of ‘Hotspots’ was developed by Norman Myers (1988) to designate specific areas for in situ conservation. The hotspots are the richest and most threatened reservoirs of plant and animal life on earth.

The criteria for determining hotspots are:
(a) Number of endemic species.
(b) Degree of threat which is measured in terms of habitat loss.

There are 25 hotspots in the world out of which two are in India. They are the Western Ghats and Eastern Himalayas.

Hotspot of Eastern Himalayas is active centers of evolution and rich in diversity of flowering angiosperms. The Western Ghats have semi-evergreen forests.

The Western Ghats include two main centers of biodiversity:

  • Aqastyamatai hills
  • Silent valley.

2. Ex-situ conservation: It means maintenance of off-site collections either in gardens by farmers, botanical garden or storing seeds, genes, pollen, tissue culture, etc. The rare plants have been found to flourish in large numbers under the care and protection of gardeners and nature lovers.

The farmers have been maintaining genetic diversity (enormous varieties) of crop plants since ancient times by saving seeds or other components for the next plantings.

Collection of samples of cultivated and wild varieties of plants and storing them in botanical gardens is another method of conservation of germplasm.

In seeds, the living material remains in a metabolically suspended state. When the seeds are to be stored for longer periods, it is necessary to avoid conditions that favor respiration and enzymatic action.

Advantages of ex situ conservation:

  • Threatened and endangered species can be conserved.
  • Genetic strains of commercially important plants can be preserved for a long time (seed banks).
  • Gametes of threatened species can be preserved in viable and fertile conditions for a longer duration by the cryopreservation technique.
  • Loss of biodiversity can be reduced.
  • Eggs can be fertilized in-vitro.
  • Can conserve a large number of species and the aesthetic value.

3. India’s effort in biodiversity conservation: India has greatly contributed to the conservation of biodiversity owing to its great utility and need for conservation.

The following measures have been taken for this purpose:
(a) Setting up of bodies like Indian Board for Wildlife, Bombay Natural History Society, etc.
(b) Observation of the first week of October as national wildlife week.
(c) introduction of the Wildlife Protection Act in 1972.
(d) Setting up of sanctuaries, national parks, and biosphere reserves.

Question 15.
(i) Why should we conserve biodiversity?
Answer:
We should conserve biodiversity for the following reasons:
(a) Narrow utilitarian arguments Human beings draw direct economic benefits from nature like food, firewood, fiber, construction materials, industrial products, medicines, etc.

(b) Broadly utilitarian arguments. Biodiversity plays a major role in maintaining and sustaining the supply of goods and services

  • Amazon forests provide 20% of the oxygen present in the atmosphere.
  • The ecosystem provides pollinators.

(c) Ethical reasons. Every organism has intrinsic value even if there is no economic value. Conservation of biodiversity.

(ii) Explain the importance of biodiversity hotspots and sacred groves. (CBSE Delhi 2016)
Answer:
Importance of biodiversity hotspots and sacred groves They provide protection of species richness and a high degree of endemism in natural habitat. Hotspots are regions of the high level of species in their natural habitat. Sacred groves are forest tracts set aside and all trees and wildlife within the area are given total protection.

Question 16.
What is the ES Nino effect? Explain how it accounts for biodiversity loss. (CBSE Delhi 2011)
Answer:
1. El Nino: It is an abnormal warming of surface ocean waters in the eastern tropical Pacific. It is called the Southern Oscillation. The Southern Oscillation is the see-saw pattern of reversing surface air pressure between the eastern and western tropical Pacific.

When the surface pressure is high in the eastern tropical Pacific it is low in the western tropical Pacific, and vice versa. Because ocean warming and pressure reversals are, for the most part, simultaneous, scientists call this phenomenon the El Nino/Southern Oscillation or ENSO for short.
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 15 Biodiversity and Conservation 5

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 15 Biodiversity and Conservation 6
El Nino Effect
Unfortunately not all El Ninos are the same nor does the atmosphere always react in the same way from one El Nino to another. This is why NASA’s Earth scientists continue to take part in international efforts to understand El Nino events. Hopefully, one day scientists will be able to provide sufficient warning so that we can be better prepared to deal with the damages and changes that El Nino causes in the weather.

Question 17.
Can you think of a situation where we deliberately want to make a species extinct? How would you justify it? (CBSE Delhi 2011)
Answer:

  1. Human effort to eradicate disease-causing organisms (Poliovirus).
  2. This situation may appear when alien species are introduced unintentionally or deliberately into an area. Some of them may become invasive and cause damage to indigenous species.
  3. Example: Nile perch introduced into lake Victoria in East Africa led to the extinction of 200 species of cichlid fish in the lake. The introduction of African catfish Clarias gariepinus for aquaculture is threatening the indigenous catfishes in rivers of India.

Question 18.
Explain biodiversity as sources of food and improved varieties.
Or
State the uses of biodiversity in modern agriculture. (CBSE 2011)
Answer:
Use of biodiversity in agriculture:

  • As a source of new crops.
  • As source material for breeding varieties.
  • As a source of new biodegradable pesticides.

Only 20% of total plant species are cultivated to produce 85% of the world’s food.

Wheat, corn, and rice, the three major carbohydrate crops, yield nearly two-third of the food sustaining the human population. Fats, oils, fibers, etc. are other uses for which more and more new species need to be investigated.

Question 19.
(i) “India has a greater ecosystem diversity than Norway.” Do you agree with the statement? Give reasons in support of your answer.
Answer:
Yes. I agree with the statement. India has greater ecosystem diversity than Norway because it has deserts, rain forests, mangroves, coral reefs, wetlands, estuaries, and alpine meadows.

(ii) Write the difference between genetic biodiversity and species biodiversity that exists at all the levels of biological organization. (CBSE 2018)
Answer:
Genetic diversity:

  1. Genetic diversity is the total number of genetic characteristics in the genetic makeup of a species.
  2. A single species might show high diversity at the genetic level, e.g. Man: Chinese, Indian American, African, etc. India has more than 50,0 genetically different strains of rice and 1,000 varieties of mango.
  3. Genetic diversity allows species to adapt to changing environments. This diversity aims to ensure that some species survive drastic changes and thus carry on desirable genes.

Specific diversity:

  1. Specific diversity is the ratio of one species population over a total number of organisms across all species in the given biome. ‘Zero’ would be infinite diversity, and ‘one’ represents only one species present.
  2. Species diversity is a measure of the diversity within an ecological community that incorporates both species richness, i.e. the number of species in a community and the evenness of species.

Question 20.
Give the approximate numbers of species that have been described and identified all over the world.
Answer:
An approximate number of species that have been described and identified from all over the World:

Group Number of species
Higher plants 2,70,000
Algae 40,000
Fungi 72,000
Bacteria (including cyanobacteria) 4,000
Viruses 1,550
Mammals 4650
Birds 9700
Reptiles 7150
Fish 26,959
Amphibians 4780
Insects 10,25,000
Crustaceans 43,000
Molluscs 70,000
Nematodes and worms 25,000
Protozoa 40,000
Others 1,10,000

Question 21.
Give an account of latitudinal gradients of biodiversity.
Answer:
Latitudinal gradients of biodiversity:

  1. Species diversity decreases from the equator towards the poles.
  2. The tropics (between 23.5°N to 23.5°S) harbor more species than temperate and polar regions.
  3. For example, the Western Ghats have a greater amphibian species diversity than the Eastern Ghats. There are more than 2,00,000 species in India of which several are confined to India (endemic).
  4. For example, Columbia situated near the equator has about 1400 species of birds, while Hew York (41 °N) has 105 species, Greenland (70°N) has about 56 species and India (in the equator region) has 1200 species.
  5. The number of species of vascular plants in the tropics is about ten times more than that of temperate forests.
  6. The Amazonian rain forest in South America has the greatest biodiversity on earth; it harbors about 40,000 species of plants, 1,25,0 species of insects, 3000 fishes, 427 amphibians, 378 reptiles, 1300 birds, and 427 mammals.

Question 22.
Discuss the characteristics of India’s biodiversity.
Answer:
Characteristics of India’s biodiversity. Biodiversity is not uniformly distributed in space and time. It is rich in tropics.

India’s biodiversity is characterized by the following:
1. India contains 10 bio-geographic regions which include the Himalayan, Trans-Himalayan, the Indian desert, the Semi-arid zone, the Western Ghats, the Deccan Peninsula, the Gangetic Plain, North-East India, and the Islands and Coasts which possess different biodiversity levels.

2. India is one of the world’s 12 leading biodiversity centers of the origin of cultivated plants.

3. Though India has only 2.4% of the land area of the world, it has 8.1% of the global species biodiversity.

4. There are about 45,000 species of plants and 90,000-1,00,000 species of animals; many more species are yet to be discovered and named.

5. If we apply Robert May’s global estimate that only 22% of the total species have been recorded, India probably has more than 1,00,000 species of plants and 3,00,000 species of animals to be discovered and described.

6. India has five natural world heritage sites, 14 biosphere reserves, 89 national parks, 492 wildlife sanctuaries, and 2 hotspots. Heritage sites are places that attract tourists.

7. About 33 percent of the country’s recorded flora are endemic to India and concentrated in the North-East, Western Ghats, North-West Himalaya, and Andaman and Nicobar islands.

Question 23.
(a) List any two ways biodiversity loss affects any region.
Answer:
Effects of biodiversity loss:

  1. The decline in plant production
  2. Lowered resistance to environmental perturbations such as drought
  3. Increased variability in certain ecosystem processes.

(b) Explain any two causes of biodiversity loss, with the help of suitable examples. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Causes of loss of biodiversity:
(A) Habitat fragmentation:

  1. Habitat loss and fragmentation create barriers that limit the potential of species to disperse and colonize new areas.
  2. Species get divided into smaller populations that are unable to sustain themselves.
  3. Migratory birds lose their seasonal habitats.
  4. It increases edge areas thus making the species more vulnerable to predators as well as wind and fire.

Thus there is the loss of biodiversity because a large number of animals, e.g. elephants, lions, bears, and large cats require big territories to move around and live in. Likewise, some birds reproduce successfully only in deep forests.

(B) Introduction of exotic species leading to endangering the species Exotic species are having a large impact especially in the island ecosystem, which harbor much of the world’s threatened biodiversity.

A few examples are:

  1. Nile perch, an exotic predatory fish introduced into Lake Victoria (South African), threatens the entire ecosystem of the lake by eliminating several native species of the small Cichlid fish species that were endemic to this freshwater aquatic system.
  2. Water hyacinth clogs rivers and lakes and threatens the survival of many aquatic species in lakes and river flood plains in several tropical countries including India.

Question 24.
List the uses of biodiversity.
Answer:
Uses of biodiversity:

  1. As a source of food and improved varieties.
  2. As a source of drugs and medicines.
  3. Aesthetic and cultural benefits. Examples of aesthetic rewards include ecotourism, bird watching, wildlife, pet-keeping, gardening, etc. Throughout human history, people have related biodiversity to the very existence of the human race through cultural and religious beliefs.
  4. Biodiversity is essential for the maintenance and sustainable utilization of goods and services from the ecological systems as well as from individual species.

Question 25.
What are the uses of IUCN Red list categories?
Answer:
Uses of Red list categories:

  • Developing awareness about the importance of threatened biodiversity.
  • Identification and documentation of endangered species.
  • Providing a global index of the decline of biodiversity.
  • Defining conservation priorities at the local level and guiding conservation action.

Question 26.
How is the “sixth episode of extinction” of species on earth, now currently in progress, different from the five earlier episodes? What is it due to? Explain the various causes that have brought about this difference.
Answer:
Earth is heading for sixth extinction due to human activities.

Anthropogenic extinction. An increasing number of species are disappearing from the face of the earth due to human activities. This man-made mass extinction represents a very severe depletion of biodiversity, particularly because it is occurring within a short period of time.

It has been estimated at World Conservation Monitoring Centre that about 384 plant species (mostly phanerogams) and 533 animal species (mostly vertebrates) have become extinct since the year 1600. This rate of extinction of species is 1000 to 10,000 times higher than the earlier rate.

A few interesting points of extinction of species noticed are:

  • Tropical forests are losing 14,000-40,0 species per year, i.e. at the rate of 2-5 species per hour.
  • Near about 50 percent of species may become extinct at the end of the 21st century, if the present rate does not retard.
  • Loss of 17,000 endemic plant species and 350,000 endemic animals may take place in the near future from 10 high diversity localities in tropical forests.

It seems that earth is heading for the sixth extinction.

Causes:

  • Increase in human population and settlements.
  • Hunting.
  • ver-exploitation of natural resources.
  • Destruction of habitat.

Question 27.
Give three hypotheses for explaining, why tropics show the greatest levels of species richness.
Answer:
The following three hypotheses explain how tropics show the greatest level of species richness:
1. Undisturbance in the tropics: Speciation is usually a function of time, unlike temperate areas subjected to frequent glaciations in the past. This type of disturbance has not occurred or remained relatively undisturbed in tropical latitudes for millions of years. Tropical regions, thus, got a long evolutionary time for species diversification.

2. Constancy in season: In tropical regions, the environment is more constant, less seasonal, and predictable. This is not so in temperate regions. Due to this stability and constancy, niche speciation takes place at a faster rate and leads to species richness.

3. Availability of more solar energy: Due to more availability of solar energy in the tropics, productivity is higher. This contributes indirectly to greater species diversity.

Question 28.
How is biodiversity important for Ecosystem functioning?
Answer:
Importance of biodiversity to the ecosystem:

  1. Ecologists believe that communities with more species tend to be more stable than those with fewer species,
  2. A stable community has the following attributes.
    (a) It shall not show too many variations in the year-to-year productivity.
    (b) It must be either resistant or resilient to seasonal disturbances.
    (c) It must be resistant also to invasion by alien species.
  3. David Tilman had shown through his ecology experiments using outdoor plots the following features.
    (a) The plots with more species showed less year-to-year variation in the total biomass.
    (b) Plots with increased diversity showed higher productivity.
  4. It is now realized that species richness and diversity are essential for ecosystem health as well as the survival of the human race on the earth.

Question 29.
What are sacred groves? What is their role in conservation? (CBSE Outside Delhi 2016)
Answer:
Sacred Groves are the secret forest patches around places of worship. They are of great religious value among tribal communities.

In such cases, nature is protected by prevailing religious and cultural traditions. Here tracts of forests are set aside and all plants and animals are venerated and provided with complete protection. Examples of sacred groves are Khasi and Jaintia hills in Meghalaya, Aravali hills in Rajasthan, Western Ghat regions of Karnataka, Maharashtra and Sargiya, Chanda and Bastar areas of M.P. In Sikkim, Khecheopalri lake is declared sacred lake by people, thus protecting the aquatic flora and fauna.

Role in conservation. Many rare and threatened plants have been protected in the sacred groves of Meghalaya. Such areas have been found to be most undisturbed and they are usually surrounded by the most degraded landscapes.

Question 30.
What is Ramsar’s mission? Explain the ‘Wise Use concept’?
Answer:
The Ramsar mission.
The Convention’s mission is “the conservation and wise use of all wetlands through local and national actions and international cooperation, as a contribution towards achieving sustainable development throughout the world”.

The Convention uses a broad definition of the types of wetlands covered in its mission, including lakes and rivers, swamps and marshes, wet grasslands and peatlands, oases, estuaries, deltas and tidal flats, near-shore marine areas, mangroves, and coral reefs, and human-made sites such as fish ponds, rice paddies, reservoirs, and salt pans. The Wise Use concept At the center of the Ramsar philosophy is the “wise use” concept.

The wise use of wetlands is defined as “the maintenance of their ecological character, achieved through the implementation of ecosystem approaches, within the context of sustainable development”. “Wise use” therefore has at its heart the conservation and sustainable use of wetlands and their resources, for the benefit of humankind.

Ramsar commitments The Ramsar Contracting Parties, or the Member States, have committed themselves to implement the “three pillars” of the Convention: to designate suitable wetlands for the List of Wetlands of International Importance (“Ramsar List”) and ensure their effective management; to work towards the wise use of all their wetlands through national land-use planning, appropriate policies and legislation, management actions, and public education; and to cooperate internationally concerning transboundary wetlands, shared wetland systems, shared species, and development projects that may affect wetlands.

Question 31.
Sanctuaries are tracts of land where animals are protected from all types of exploitation. Private ownership is permitted. Collection of minor forest products are allowed.
(i) How many sanctuaries are present in India?
Answer:
India has 551 sanctuaries.

(ii) How much land area they cover?
Answer:
3.6% of geographical area.

(iii) Name any three sanctuaries.
Answer:
(a) Keoladeo Ghana Bird Sanctuary, Bharatpur, Rajasthan
(b) Sultanpur Lake Bird Sanctuary, Gurgaon, Haryana
(c) Periyar Sanctuary, Kerala

(iv) List any three human activities which are allowed In sanctuaries.
Answer:
(a) CoLLection of forest products
(b) Harvesting of timber
(C) Tilling of Land
(d) Private ownership of Land.

Question 32.
Make a list of Ramsar Sites In India.
Answer:
A-List of Ramsar sites in India is as following:

Sr Name of Ramsar Site Location
1. Ashtamudi Wetland Kerala
2. Bhitarkanika Mangroves Odisha
3. Bhoj Wetland Madhya Pradesh
4. Chandra Taal Himachal Pradesh
5. Chitika lake Odisha
6. Deepor Beet Assam
7. East Calcutta Wetlands West Bengal
8. Harike Wetland Punjab
9. Hokersar Wetland Jammu and Kashmir
10. Kanji Wetland Punjab
11. Keoladeo National Park Rajasthan
12. Kolleru lake Andhra Pradesh
13. Loktak lake Manipur
14. Nalsarovar Bird Sanctuary Gujarat
15. Point Calimere Wildlife and Bird Sanctuary Tamil Nadu
16. Pong Dam lake Himachal Pradesh
17. Renuka Wetland Himachal Pradesh
18. Ropar Punjab
19. Rudrasagar lake Tripura
20. Sambhar lake Rajasthan
21. Sasthamkotta lakes Kerala
22. SurinsarMansar lakes Jammu and Kashmir
23. Tsomoriri Jammu and Kashmir
24. Upper Ganga River (Brljghat to Narora Stretch) Uttar Pradesh
25. Vembanad-Kol Wetland Kerala
26. Wular lake Jammu and Kashmir

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 1 with Solutions

Students can access the CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard with Solutions and marking scheme Set 1 will help students in understanding the difficulty level of the exam.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 1 with Solutions

Time: 3 Hours
Maximum Marks: 80

General Instructions:

1. This question paper contains two parts, A and B.
2. Both Part A and Part B have internal choices.

Part-A:
1. It consists of two sections, I and II.
2. Section I has 16 questions of 1 mark each. Internal choice is provided in 5 questions.
3. Section II has 4 questions on case study. Each case study has 5 case-based sub-parts. An examinee is to attempt any 4 out of 5 sub-parts.

Part-B:
1. It consists of three sections III, IV and V.
2. In section III, Question Nos. 21 to 26 are Very Short Answer Type questions of 2 marks each.
3. In section IV, Question Nos. 27 to 33 are Short Answer Type questions of 3 marks each.
4. In section V, Question Nos. 34 to 36 are Long Answer Type questions of 5 marks each.
5. Internal choice is provided in 2 questions of 2 marks, 2 questions of 3 marks and 1 question of 5 marks.

Part – A
Section-I

Section 1 has 16 questions of 1 mark each. Internal choice is provided in 5 questions.

Question 1.
Find the zeroes of the of the polynomials p(x) = 4x2 – 12x + 9
Solution :
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.1

Question 2.
In the given figure, DE || BC. Find \(\frac{x}{y}\) DE || BC
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.3
Solution :
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.2

Question 3.
If 2k + 1, 6, 3& + 1 are in AP, then find the value of k.
OR
If the sum of n terms of an AP is 2n2 + 5n, then find the 2nd term
Solution :
For an AP a, b, c; 2b = a + c ⇒ (2k + 1) + (3k + 1) = 2×6
5k+2=12
⇒ 5k = 10
⇒ k = 2
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.54

Question 4.
If x = a, y = b is the solution of the pair of equations x-y-2 and x + y = 4, then find the values of a and b.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.4

Question 5.
At one end A of a diameter AB of a circle of radius 5 cm, tangent XAY is drawn to the circle (see figure). Find the length of the chord CD parallel to XY and at a distance 8 cm from A.
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.5
Solution :
OD2 = OM2 + DM2
⇒ 52 = 32 + x2
x2 = 25 – 9 = 16
x = 4
CD =2 x = 2 × 4 = 8 cm

Question 6.
Find the radius of the largest right circular cone that can be cut out from a cube of edge 4.2 cm.
Solution :
Edge of the cube = 4.2 cm
∴ Radius of the largest right circular cone \(\frac{1}{2}\) (Edge of the Square) \(=\frac{4.2}{2}=2.1 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Question 7.
The circumference of a circle exceeds its diameter by 180 cm. Find its radius
Solution :
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.6

Question 8.
A bag contains 40 balls out of which some are red, some are blue and remaining are black. If the probability of drawing a red ball is \(\frac{11}{20} \) and that of blue ball is \(\frac{1}{5} \) , then find the number of black balls.
OR
Rahim tosses two different coins simultaneously. Find the probability of getting at least one tail.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.7

Let the number of black balls = x.

Total number of balls = Total possible outcomes = 40

CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.8
⇒ Number of black balls =10
OR
Number of possible outcomes = 4 as possible outcomes are HH, HT, TH, TT. Favourable outcomes for getting at least one tail are HT, TH, TT No. of favourable outcomes = 3
∴ P(getting at least one tail) =\(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 9.
If Cos θ \(\frac{7}{8}\) then find the value of \(\frac{(1+\cos \theta)(1-\cos \theta)}{(1-\sin \theta)(1+\sin \theta)}\)
Solution :
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.9

Question 10.
Write whether the rational number \(\frac{7}{75}\) will have a terminating decimal expansion or a non-terminating repeating decimal expansion.
OR
Write the HCF of the smallest composite number and the smallest prime number.
Solution :
\(\frac{7}{75}=0.0933333 \ldots \ldots=0.09 \overline{3}\)
So, it is a non-terminating repeating decimal expansion.
OR
The smallest composite number is 4 and the smallest prime number is 2.
The prime factorisation of 4 = 2 x 2 = 22 and the prime factorisation of 2 = 21
Now, the HCF of 2 and 4 is the product of smallest power of each common prime factor in . the numbers.
HCF (2, 4) = 21 = 2

Question 11.
Find the value(s) of k, if the quadratic equation 3x2 – k √3x + 4 = 0 has equal roots.
OR
If -5 is a root of the quadratic equation 2x2 + px – 15 = 0 and the quadratic equation p(x2 + x) + k = 0 has equal roots, then find the value of k.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.10

Question 12.
In the given figure, ABCD is a rectangle. Find the values of x and y.
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.11
Solution :
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.12

Question 13.
If ax2 + bx + c = 0 has equal roots, find the value of
Solution :
For equal roots D = 0
i.e., b2 – 4ac =0
⇒ b2 = 4ac
\(c=\frac{b^{2}}{4 a}\)

Question 14.
In the given figure, PA and PB are tangents to the circle drawn from an external point P. CD is the third tangent touching the circle at Q. If PA = 15 cm, find the perimeter of APCD.
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.13
OR
In the given figure, the quadrilateral PQRS circumscribes a circle with centre O. If ∠POQ = 115°, then find ∠ROS.
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.14
Solution :
Since PA and PB are tangents from same external point P.
PA = PB = 15 cm
Now, Perimeter of APCD = PC + CD + DP = PC + CQ + QD + DP
= PC + CA + DB + DP = PA + PB = 15 cm +15 cm = 30 cm
OR
Solution :
Since  ∠POQ = ∠ROS   (Vertically opposite angles)
⇒ ∠ROS = 115°

Question 15.
To divide a line segment AB in the ratio 5 : 7, first a ray AX is drawn such that ∠BAX is an acute angle and then at equal distances points are marked on the ray. Find the minimum number of these points.
Solution :
Since 5+ 7 = 12
So, the number of points marked on ray AX = 12.

Question 16.
Find the value of (sin 30° + cos 60°).
Solution :
sin 30° + cos 60° \(=\frac{1}{2}+\frac{1}{2}=\)

Section-II

Question 17.
Case Study Based-1
Medicinal Garden
A medicinal garden is a garden in which different kinds of medicinal plants, like Aloe Vera, Mint, Lemon Balm, etc. are planted with the goal of serving the need of general health maintenance. Observe the following diagram.
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.15

Refer to IJKL
(a) The mid-point of the segment joining the points 1(6, 6) and J(6, 18) is
(i) (7,9)
(ii) \(\left(12, \frac{11}{2}\right) \)
(iii) (6, 12)
(iv) (12,24)

Refer to EFGH
(b) The distance between points H(10, 6) and F(14, 18) is
(i) \(8 \sqrt{5}\)unit
(ii) \(4 \sqrt{10}\) unit
(iii) 18 unit
(iv) 24 unit

Refer to ABCD

(c) The coordinates of the points A and B are (22,6) and (22,18) respectively. The x-coordinate of a point R on the line segment AB such that \(\frac{A R}{A B}=\frac{3}{5}\) is…………….
(i) 18
(ii) 24
(iii) 22
(iv) 31

Refer to MQ

(d) The ratio in which the points (20, k) divides the line segment joining the points M(4, 2) and Q(24, 2) is
(i) 4 : 1
(ii) 16 : 15
(iii) 8 : 21
(iv) 10 : 17

Refer to MH and HP

How much longer is HP than MH given that coordinates of H(10, 6), M(4, 2) and P(19,2)
(i) \((\sqrt{95}-2 \sqrt{3}) \text { unit }\)
(ii) \((\sqrt{97}-2 \sqrt{13}) \text { unit }\)
(iii) \((\sqrt{61}-4 \sqrt{5}) \text { unit }\)
(iv) None of there.
Solution:
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.16
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.17

CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.18

Question 18.
Case Study Based-2
A Frame House
A frame-house is a house constructed from a wooden skeleton, typically covered with timber board. The concept of similar triangles is used to construct it. Look at the following picture:
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.19
Refer to House (i)
(a) The front view of house (7) is shown below in which point P on AB is joined with point Q
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.21

If PQ || BC, AP = x m  PB = 10 m. AQ = (x – 2) m, QC = 6 m, then the value of a is
(i) 3m
(ii) 4m
(iii) 5m
(iv) 8 m

(b) The side vies of house (i) is shown below in which point F on AC is joined with point G on DE.

CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.22

If ACED is a trapezium with AD || CE, F and G are points on non-parallel sides AC and AF
DE respectively such that FG is parallel to AD, then =\(\frac{\mathrm{AF}}{\mathrm{FC}}=\)
(i) \(\frac{\mathrm{DG}}{\mathrm{GE}}\)
(ii) \(\frac{\mathrm{AD}}{\mathrm{CE}}\)
(iii) \(\frac{\mathrm{AF}}{\mathrm{GE}}\)
(iv) \(\frac{\mathrm{DG}}{\mathrm{FC}}\)

(c) The front view of house (ii) is shown below in which point S on PQ is joined with point T on PR.
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.23
\(\frac{\mathrm{PS}}{\mathrm{QS}}=\frac{\mathrm{PT}}{\mathrm{TR}} \text { and } \angle \mathrm{PST}=70^{\circ}, \angle \mathrm{QPR}=50^{\circ}\) then the angle ∠QRP =
(i) 70°
(ii) 50°
(iii) 80°
(iv) 60°

(d) Again consider the front view of house (ii). If S and T are points on side PQ and PR respectively such that
ST || QR and PS : SQ = 3 : 1. Also TP = 6.6 m, then PR is
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.24
(i) 6.9 m
(ii) 8.8 m
(iii) 10.5m
(iv) 9.4 m

(e) Sneha has also a frame house whose front view is shown below
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.25
If MN || AB, BC = 7.5 m, AM = 4 m and MC = 2 m, then length of BN is
(i) 5 m
(ii) 4 m
(iii) 8 m
(iv) 9 m
Solution :
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.26
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.27
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.28
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.29
Question 19.
Case Study Based-3
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.30

Rainbow is an arch of colours that is visible in the sky, caused by the refraction and dispersion of the sun’s light after rain or other water droplets in the atmosphere. The colours of the rainbow are generally said to be red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and violet.

Each colour of rainbow makes a parabola. We know that for any quadratic polynomial ax2 + bx + c, a ≠ 0, the graph of the corresponding equation y = ax2 + bx + c has one of the two shapes either open upwards like ∪ or open downwards like ∩ depending on whether a > 0 or a < 0. These curves are called parabolas.

(a) A rainbow is represented by the quadratic polynomial x2 + (a + 1 )x + b whose zeroes are 2 and-3. Then
(i) a = -7, b   = -1
(ii)  a = 5, b =-1
(iii)  a – 2, b = – 6
(iv)   a – 0, b = – 6

(b) The polynomial x2 – 2x – (7p + 3) represents a rainbow.   If -4 is zero of it, then the value of p is
(i) 1
(ii)  2
(iii) 3
(iv)  4

(c) The graph of a rainbow y=f(x) is shown below.
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.31
The number of zeroes of f(x) is
(i) 0
(ii) 1
(iii) 2
(iv) 3

(d) If graph of a rainbow does not intersect the x-axis but intersects y-axis in one point, then number of zeroes of the polynomial is equal to
(i) 0
(ii) 1
(iii) 0 OR 1
(iv) none of these

(e) The representation of a rainbow is a quadratic polynomial. The sum and the product of its zeroes are 3 and -2 respectively. The polynomial is 1
(i) k(x2 – 2x – 3), for some real k.
(ii) k(x2 – 5x – 9), for some real k.
(iii) k(x2 – 3x – 2), for some real k.
(iv) k(x2 – 8x + 2), for some real k.
Solution :
(a) x2 + (a + 1)x + b =(2)2 + (a + 1)2 + b = 0 and (-3)2 + (a + l)(-3) + b = 0
⇒ 4 + 2a + 2 + 6=0 and 9 — 3a — 3 + 6 = 0
⇒ 2a + b=-6      … (i)
and  -3a + b=-6   …(ii)
Solving (i) and (ii), we get a = 0 and b = -6
So, option (iv) is correct answer.

(b) p(-4) = 0 ⇒ (-4)2 – 2(-4) – (7p + 3) = 0
⇒ 16 + 8 – 7p-3 = 0    ⇒ 21 – 7p = 0
⇒ p = 3
So, option (iii) is correct answer.

(c) ∵ Graph f(x) intersects x-axis at two different points.
∴  Number of zeroes of f(x) = 2.
So, option (iii) is correct answer.

(d) We know that the number of zeroes of a polynomial is equal to number of points of intersection of the graph of polynomial with x-axis.
Since the graph of rainbow does not intersect the x-axis, so it has no zeroes.
So, option (i) is correct answer.

(e) Let the required polynomial be f(x).
Then f(x) = k(x2 – 3x – 2) for some real k.
So, option (iii) is correct answer.

Question 20.
Case Study Based-4

Cost of Living Index 140-150 150-160 160-170 170-180 180-190 190-200 Total
Number of weeks 5 10 20 9 6 2 52

(a) The mid-value (class-mark) of 160-170 is ……..
(i) 140
(ii) 145
(iii) 155
(iv) 165

(b) The approximate mean weekly cost-of-living index is 1
(i) 166.4
(ii) 184.5
(iii) 190
(iv) 201.8

(c) The sum of lower and upper limits of modal class is
(i) 290
(ii) 310
(iii) 330
(iv) 350

(d) Mode is the value of the variable which has
(i) maximum frequency
(ii) minimum frequency
(iii) mean frequency
(iv) middle most frequency

(e) The median class of above data is
(i) 150-160
(ii) 160-170
(iii) 170-180
(iv) 190-200

Solution :
(a) Class-mark of 160-170 = \(160-170=\frac{160+170}{2}=\frac{330}{2}=165\)
So, option (iv) is correct answer.

Cost of Living Index No. of Weeks (fi) Mid-point (xi) fixi
140-150 5 145 725
150-160 10 155 1550
160-170 20 165 3300
170-180 9 175 1575
180-190 6 185 1110
190-200 2 195 390
Total n = 52 8650

\(\text { Mean }=\frac{\sum f_{i} x_{i}}{\sum f_{i}}=\frac{8650}{52}=166.4(\text { approx. })\)
So, option (i) is correct answer.

(c) Maximum frequency is 20
∴ Modal class = 160-170
Lower limit of modal class = 160
Upper limit of modal class =170
Sum of lower and upper limits = 160 + 170 = 330
So, option (iii) is correct answer.

(d) (i) Maximum frequency

Cost of Living Index f cf
140-150 5 5
150-160 10 15
160-170 20 35
170-180 9 44
180-190 6 50
190-200 2 52

n= 52 \(\Rightarrow \frac{n}{2}=26\)
Median class is 160-170.
So, option (ii) is correct answer.

Part-B
Section-III

Question 21.
If two positive integers p and q are written as p = a2b2 and q = a3b; a, b are prime numbers, then verify: LCM (p, q) x HCF (p, q) =pq.
Answer:
LCM (p, q) =a3b3 and HCF (p, q) = a2b
LCM (p, q) x HCF (p, q) =a5b4 = (a2b3) (a3 b) = pq

Question 22.
Draw a line segment of length 6 cm. Using compass and ruler, find a point P on it which divides it in the ratio 3:4.
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.32
Solution :
Steps of construction:
1. Draw a line segment AB = 6 cm.
2. Draw an acute angle <BAX.
3. Along AX take 7 points, such that
AA1 — A1 A2 — A2 A3 — A3A4 — A4A5 – A5A6 — A6A7
4. Join BA7
5. Through A3 draw A3P A7B which meets AB at P.
6. AP: PB = 3 : 4 and P is the required point.

Question 23.
If 7 sin2 A + 3 cos2 A = 4, show that tan \(A=\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\)
OR
Prove that \(\frac{\cos A}{1+\sin A}+\frac{1+\sin A}{\cos A}=2 \sec A\)
Solution :
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.33

Question 24.
In the given figure, XY and XT’ are two parallel tangents to a circle with centre O and another tangent AB with point of contact C intersecting XY at A and XT’ at B. Prove that ∠AOB = 90°.
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.34
Solution :
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.35

Question 25.
The coordinates of the points P and Q are respectively (4,—3) and (—1, 7). Find the x-coordinate (abscissa) of a point R on the line segment PQ such that \(\frac{P R}{P Q}=\frac{3}{5}\)
OR
Find the ratio in which the point (—3, k) divides the line segment joining the points (—5, —4) and (—2, 3). Also find the value of k.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.36
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.37

Question 26.
Find k, if the sum of the zeroes of the polynomial x2 – (k + 6) x + 2 (2k – 1) is half of their product.
Answer:
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.38

Section-IV

Question 27.
In a seminar, the number of participants in Hindi, English and Mathematics are 60, 84 and 108 respectively. Find the minimum number of rooms required if in each room the same number of participants are to be seated and all of them being of the same subject.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.39

Question 28.
In the given figure, ABPC is a quadrant of a circle of radius 14 cm and a semicircle is drawn with BC as diameter. Find the area of the shaded region.
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.40
Solution :
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.41

Question 29.
Show that in a right triangle, the square of the hypotenuse is equal to the sum of the squares
of the other two sides.
OR
P is the mid-point of side BC of AABC, Q is the mid-point of AP, BQ when produced meets AC at L. Prove that AL = \(\frac{1}{3} \) AC.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.42

CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.43
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.53

Question 30.
The following distribution shows the daily pocket allowance of children of a locality. The mean pocket allowance is ₹ 18. Find the missing frequency k.

Daily pocket allowance
(in ₹)
11-13 13-15 15-17 17-19 19-21 21-23 23-25
Number of children 3 6 9 13 k 5 4

Solution :
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.46
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.47

Question 31.
Using quadratic formula, solve the following equation for X:
abx2+(b2—ac)x—bc=O
OR
The difference of two natural numbers is 5 and the difference of their reciprocals is \(\frac{1}{10}\). Find the numbers.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.48

Let the two natural numbers be x and y such that x >y
According to the question,
Difference of numbers,
x – y =  5    ⇒  x = 5 +y ……………(1)
Difference of their reciprocals,
\(\frac{1}{y}-\frac{1}{x}=\frac{1}{10}\)
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.62
= (y – 5)(y + 10) = 0  ∴ y = 5  or y = – 10
y is a natural number. ∴ y = 5
Putting the value of)’ in (i), we get
x= 5+5=10
Thus, the required numbers are 10 and 5.

Question 32.
Find the angle of depression from the top of 12m high tower of an object lying at a point 12 m away from the base of the tower.
Solution :
Let AB be the tower of 12 m height and B its base. Let C be a point A 12 m away from base B of tower AB where an object situated.
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.50
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.51

Question 33.
If the median of the distribution given below is 28.5, find the values of x and y.

Class interval 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 Total
Frequency 5 X 20 15 y 5 60

Solution :
Here, median = 28.5, n = 60

Class interval Frequency (f) Cumulative frequency (cf)
0-10 5 5
10-20 X 5 + x
20-30 20 25 + x
30-10 15 40+ x
40-50 y 40 + x + y
50-60 5 45+x + y
Total ∑ fi = 60

CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.52

Section – V

Question 34.
The angles of depression of the top and bottom of a building 50 metres high as observed from the top of a tower are 30° and 60°, respectively. Find the height of the tower and also the horizontal distance between the building and the tower.
OR
The angle of elevation of the top of a tower 30 m high from the foot of another tower in the same plane is 60° and the angle of elevation of the top of the second tower from the foot of the first tower is 30°. Find the distance between the two towers and also the height of the other tower.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.56
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.57
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.58

Thus, height of the other tower = 10 m and the distance between two towers = BD = 10√3 m.

Question 35.
A hemispherical depression is cut out from one face of a cubical wooden block of edge 21 cm, such that the diameter of the hemisphere is equal to the edge of the cube. Determine the volume and total surface area of the remaining block.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.59

Question 36.
A person can row 8 km upstream and 24 km downstream in 4 hours. He can row 12 km downstream and 12 km upstream in 4 hours. Find the speed of the person in still water and also the speed of the current. 5
Solution :
Let the person’s speed of rowing in still water be, x km/h and speed of the current y km/h.
∴ Speed of boat in downstream = (x + y) km/h
and speed of boat in upstream = (x -y) km/h
Since \(\text { Time }=\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { Speed }}\)
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.60
CBSE Sample Paper 2020 Class 10 Maths Standard with Solution Set 1.61

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions

Students can access the CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science with Solutions and marking scheme Set 3 will help students in understanding the difficulty level of the exam.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions

Time: 3 Hours
Maximum Marks: 80

General Instructions:

(i) The question paper comprises four sections A, B, C and D. There are 36 questions in the question paper. All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Section-A – question no. 1 to 20 – all questions and parts there of are of one mark each.
These questions contain multiple choice questions (MCQs), very short answer questions and assertion – reason type questions. Answers to these should be given in one word or one sentence.
(iii) Section-B – question no. 21 to 26 are short answer type questions, carrying 2 marks each. Answers to these questions should in the range of 30 to 50 words.
(iv) Section-C – question no. 27 to 33 are short answer type questions, carrying 3 marks each.
Answers to these questions should in the range of 50 to 80 words. :
(v) Section—D – question no. – 34 to 36 are long answer type questions carrying 5 marks each. Answer to these questions should be in the range of 80 to 120 words.
(vi) There is no overall choice. However, internal choices have been provided in some questions. A student has to attempt only one of the alternatives in such questions.
(vii) Wherever necessary, neat and properly labelled diagrams should be drawn.

Section – A

Question 1.
Name a cyclic unsaturated carbon compound.
Answer:
Cyclopentene / Cyclohexene-formula or structure (or any other).

Question 2.
The change in magnetic field lines in a coil is the cause of induced electric current in it. Name the underlying phenomenon.
Answer:
Electromagnetic Induction

Question 3.
Why do we store silver chloride in dark coloured bottles?
Answer:
It is because it undergoes photochemical decomposition reaction in the presence of sunlight.

Question 4.
How many male gametes are produced by pollen grains?
Answer:
Two

Question 5.
Two beakers with chemicals are shown below. Name the beaker which will show exothermic reaction and the one which will be endothermic in nature.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 1
Answer:
Exothermic : Beaker A
Endothermic : Beaker B

Question 6.
What will happen, if a solution of sodium hydrogen carbonate is heated? Give the equation of the reaction involved.
OR
How chloride of lime differs chemically from calcium chloride?
Answer:
Sodium carbonate, carbon dioxide and water will be formed.
\(2 \mathrm{NaHCO}_{3}(\mathrm{~s}) \stackrel{\text { Heat }}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{Na}_{2} \mathrm{CO}_{3}(\mathrm{~s})+\mathrm{CO}_{2}(\mathrm{~g})+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O} \text { ( } \mathrm{l}\)

Question 11.
What will happen to a plant if its xylem is removed?
OR
Why is it advisable to breathe through nose?
Answer:
If xylem is removed from a plant, transport of water and nutrients will stop and plant will die.
OR
There are fine hair and mucus gland in the inner lining of nose which can filter the incoming air from germs and dust. Moreover, the air attains the optimum temperature before reaching the lungs.

Question 12.
An element ‘X’ on reacting with oxygen forms an oxide X2O. This oxide dissolves in water and turns blue litmus red. State whether ‘X’ is metal or non-metal.
Answer:
Non-metal

Question 13.
What is the speed of blue light travelling in vacuum?
Answer:
The speed of blue light is same as that of light i.e. 3 x 108 m s1.
Assertion (A) and Reason (R)
For question numbers 14,15 and 16, two statements are given- one labeled Assertion (A) and the other labeled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (i), (iii) and (iv) as given below:

(i) Both A and R are true, and R is correct explanation of the assertion.
(ii) Both A and R are true, but R is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
(iii) A is true, but R is false.
(iv) A is false, but R is true.

Question 14.
A. The element carbon forms the basic structural framework of more compounds than any other element.
R. The carbon-carbon bond is ionic.
Answer:
(iii)

Question 15.
A. Pollination is different from fertilisation.
R. The process of transfer of pollens from anther to stigma is called pollination which takes place in plants.
Answer:
(iv)

Question 16.
A. A 200 W bulb glows with more brightness than 100 W bulb.
R. 100 W bulb has more resistance than 200 W bulb.
OR
A. When two resistances of 4Ω are connected in series, total resistance is 8Ω.
B. When two resistances of 4Ω are connected in parallel total resistance is 2Ω.
Answer:
(i) OR (ii)

Answer Q. No 17 – 20 contain five sub-parts each. You are expected to answer any four sub­parts in these questions.

Question 17.
Read the following and answer any four questions from 17 (i) to 17 (v) (4 × 1 = 4)

The growing size of the human population is a cause of concern for all people. The rate of birth and death in a given population will determine its size. Reproduction is the process by which organisms increase their population. The process of sexual maturation for reproduction is gradual and takes place while general body growth is still going on. Some degree of sexual

chemicals are not biodegradable, they get accumulated progressively at each trophic level. The maximum concentration of these chemicals gets accumulated in our bodies and greatly affects the health of our mind and body.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 2

(i) Why is the maximum concentration of pesticides found in human beings?
(a) Humans are at the top level in any food chain
(b) Major part of crops cultivated using pesticides are consumed by humans
(c) Pesticides are stored in different organs of humans
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Humans are at the top level in any food chain

(ii) Which method could be applied to reduce our intake of pesticides through food to some extent.
(a) Washing crops thoroughly
(b) Organic fanning
(c) Use of bio-pesticides
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

(iii) Various steps in a food chain represent:
(a) Food web
(b) Trophic level
(c) Ecosystem
(d) Biomagnification
Answer:
(b) Trophic level

(iv) With regard to various food chains operating in an ecosystem, man is a:
(a) Consumer
(b) Producer
(c) Producer and consumer
(d) Producer and decomposer
Answer:
(a) Consumer

(v) Food web is constituted by
(a) relationship between the organisms and the environment.
(b) relationship between plants and animals.
(c) various interlinked food chains in an ecosystem.
(d) relationship between animals and environment
Answer:
(c) various interlinked food chains in an ecosystem.

Question 19.
Read the following and answer any four questions from 19 (i) to 19 (v) (4 × 1 = 4)

Electrical resistivity and its inverse, electrical conductivity are fundamental properties of a material that quantifies how strongly it resists or conducts electric current. A low resistivity indicates a material that readily allows electric current to flow.

Resistance is defined as the ratio of potential difference across a conductor to the current passing through it. Resistance is the property of a conductor to resist the flow of charges through it.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 3

Both resistance and resistivity describe how difficult it is to G make electrical current flow through a material, but unlike w resistance, resistivity is an intrinsic property. This means that g all pure copper wires irrespective of their shape and size, have the same resistivity, but a long, thin copper wire has a much larger resistance than a thick, short copper wire. Every material has its own characteristic resistivity. For example, rubber has a far larger resistivity than copper. The resistivity of metals also varies with temperature.

The resistance of almost all alloys increases with increase in temperature but the rate of change of resistance is less than that of metals. In fact, the resistance of certain alloys such as Manganin, Eureka and Constantan show practically no change in resistance to a considerable range of temperature.                        ‘

(i) What happens to the resistivity of a wire if it is stretched?
(a) It will increase
(b) It will decrease
(c) First increases then decreases
(d) Remains the same
Answer:
(d) Remains the same

(ii) Though silver is a good conductor, why it is not an ideal choice for transmission of electricity?
1. It is expensive
2. It oxidizes and tarnishes when it comes in contact with air
3. Its resistivity decreases with increase in temperature
(a) Only 1
(b) Only 2
(c) Both 1 and 2
(d) Only 3
Answer:
(c) Both 1 and 2

(iii) The area of cross section of a wire becomes half when its length is stretched to double. How the resistance of the wire is affected in the new condition?
(a) Resistance of the wire remains unchanged
(b) Resistance of the wire decreases to half
(c) Resistance of the wire increases to double
(d) Resistance of the wire increases four times
Answer:
(d) Volume of the wire remains the same before and after stretching. Assuming wire to be cylindrical in shows them  volume = Area of base x height/length
Due to stretching if length is increased, area will decrease.
R = ρl/A
New length = 2l
New area = A/2
Resistance increases four times.

(iv) If there are two wires, W1 and W2 of same material and same length but have radius r and 2r respectively, then which wire will have more resistance?
(a) Wire W1 has more resistance as compare to W2
(b) Wire W2 has more resistance as compare to W1
(c) Both the wires have same resistance
(d) Wire W2 has three times resistance than wire W1
Answer:
(a) Wire W1 has more resistance as compare to W2

(v) Ajay made the following conclusions regarding resistance of metals/alloy. Which one would you disagree with?
(a) The resistivity of a metal decreases with temperature
(b) A thick copper wire has less resistance than a thin copper wire of the same length
(c) Alloys are often used in the manufacture of standard resistors
(d) Low resistivity means the material easily allow the flow of electric current
Answer:
(a) The resistivity of a metal decreases with temperature

Question 20.
Read the following and answer any four questions from 20 (i) to 20 (v) (4 × 1 = 4)
The following graph shows the volume of hydrogen collected in four different experiments when dil. hydrochloric acid was reacted with zinc, copper, magnesium and iron metal.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 4
(i) Name the graph that produces hydrogen gas faster.
(a) Graph 1
(b) Graph 2
(c) Graph 3
(d) Graph 4
Answer:
(d) Graph 4

(ii) Name the metal used in experiment that gave the result for graph-4.
(a) Mg
(b) Zn
(c) Fe
(d) Cu
Answer:
(a) Mg

(iii) Ways to speed up the slow reaction are
1. heating the reactants
2. cooling the reactants
3. using more diluted acid
4. using more concentrated acid
(a) 1 only
(b) 1 and 4
(c) 1 and 3
(d) 2 and 4
Answer:
(b) 1 and 4

(iv) The amount of zinc metal used for the above reaction is same but the concentration of acid is changed, what would be the effect on the rate of reaction?
(a) no change
(b) the speed will increase
(c) the speed will decrease
(d) the information is incomplete
Answer:
(d) the information is incomplete

(v) Which of the following metal liberates hydrogen gas on reaction with dilute HNO3.
(a) Zn
(b) Cu
(c) Mg
(d) Fe
Answer:
(c) Mg

Section – B

Question 21.
The period 3 oxides are given below.
[Na2O, MgO] [Al2O3]……………………. [SO2, Cl2O]
A                               B                                           C
State 2 characters of these oxides grouped as A & C
Answer:
Oxide A: Na2O, MgO are basic in nature and ionic Oxide C : SO2, Cl2O are acidic in nature and covalent

Question 22.
Name two human organs that perform dual function and explain their functions to justify their dual nature.
Answer:
Two human organs with dual nature are pancreas and gonads. Pancreas secretes insulin hormone and digestive enzymes like trypsin ( pancreatic enzyme) similarly human gonads like testis and ovaries secretes the gametes like sperms and ovum respectively along with the sex hormones.

Question 23.
Why are small number of surviving tigers a cause of worry from genetics point of view?
Answer:
(i) Tigers may get extinct in near future due to natural calamities, lack of available food and due to their small number.
(ii) Cross breeding may be less possible. Variations will not occur, which is essential for the survival.
(iii) Adaptation due to changing environment, like cutting of forests, global warming becomes difficult.
(iv) Protection from enemies is easy if they are more in number.

Question 24.
An object is placed at a distance of 15 cm from a concave lens of focal length 30 cm. List four characteristics (nature, position, etc.) of the image formed by the lens.
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 5

The image will be formed at 10 cm from ‘O’ on the same side as the object. It will be virtual, erect and diminished.

Question 25.
Write chemical equation for the reaction when
(i) Steam acts on red hot iron.
(ii) Zinc is added to iron(II) sulphate solution.
OR
State two reasons for the following facts:
(i) Sulphur is a non-metal.
(ii) Magnesium is a metal.
One of the reason must be supported with a chemical equation.
Answer:
(i) \(3 \mathrm{Fe}(s)+4 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}(g) \underset{\text { steam }}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{Fe}_{3} \mathrm{O}_{4}(s)+4 \mathrm{H}_{2}(g)\)
(ii) Zn(s) + FeSO4(aq) → ZnSO4(aq) + Fe(s)
OR
(i) Sulphur is a poor conductor of electricity.
It reacts with oxygen to form SO2 which forms acidic solution in water.
S + O2 → S02
SO2 + H2O →H2SO3

(ii) Magnesium is a metal because it is a good conductor of electricity.
It forms basic oxide with oxygen
\(2 \mathrm{Mg}+\mathrm{O}_{2} \stackrel{\text { Burning }}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{MgO}\)
\(\mathrm{MgO}+\underset{(\mathrm{Hot})}{\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}} \rightarrow \underset{(\text { Base })}{\mathrm{Mg}(\mathrm{OH})_{2}}\)

Question 26.
Study the following circuit and answer the questions that follows:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 6
(i) How much current is flowing through
(a) 10 Q and
(b) 15 Q resistor?
(ii) What is the ammeter reading?
OR
Find the current drawn from the battery by the network of four resistors shown in the figure.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 7
Answer:
(i) Current through
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 8
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 9

Question 27.
1 g of copper powder was taken in a China dish and heated. What change takes place on heating? When hydrogen gas is passed over this heated substance, a visible change is seen in it. Give the chemical equations of reactions, the name and the color of the products formed in each case.
Answer:
A black colour is formed on the surface
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 10

Original/brown colour is restored
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 11

Question 28.
List the important products of the Chlor-alkali process. Write one important use of each.
OR
How is washing soda prepared from sodium carbonate? Give its chemical equation. State the type of this salt. Name the type of hardness of water which can be removed by it?
Answer:
Products: Hydrogen, Chlorine, Sodium hydroxide Uses:
Hydrogen: In the production of margarine/ammonia/as a fuel
Chlorine: Water treatment / swimming pools / production of PVC / Disinfectants / CFCs / Pesticides
Sodium hydroxide: For degreasing metal surface / in making soaps and detergents / paper making / artificial fibres.
OR
1. By recrystallisation of sodium carbonate
2. Na2CO3 + 10H2O → Na2CO3.10H2O
3. Basic Salt
4. Permanent hardness

Question 29.
Study the following cross showing self pollination in F1, fill in the blank and answer the question that follow:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 12
What are the combinations of character in the F2 progeny? What are their ratios?
Answer:
F1 progeny is Rr Yy-Round, Yellow
Combinations of character in the F2 progeny are:

  • Round yellow — 9 (Both dominant traits)
  • Round green — 3 (One recessive, one dominant)
  • Wrinkled yellow — 3 (One dominant, one recessive)
  • Wrinkled green — 1 (both recessive traits)

The ratio is 9 : 3 : 3 : 1

Question 30.
Define the term pollination. Differentiate between self pollination and cross pollination. What is the significance of pollination?
Answer:
Pollination is the transfer of pollen from another to stigma.

Self Pollination Cross Pollination
Transfer of pollen in the same flower. Transfer of pollen from one flower to another.

• Pollination leads to fertilization resulting in the formation of zygote.

Question 31.
Why is Tyndall effect shown by colloidal particles? State four instances of observing the Tyndall effect.
Answer:
Because of the scattering of light.
Instances:

  • When a fine beam of light enters a smoke-filled dark room through a small hole.
  • When sunlight passes through a canopy of dense forest in foggy/ misty conditions.
  • Blue colour of sky.
  • Red colour of the sun during sunrise or sunset.

Question 32.
A V-I graph for a nichrome wire is given below. What do you infer from this graph? Draw a labelled circuit diagram to obtain such a graph.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 13
Answer:
V α I or Potential difference is directly proportional to current
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 14
Note: If circuit diagram is correct but labelling of ammeter and voltmeter are incorrect, deduct 1 mark.

Question 33.
(i) Write the mathematical expression for Joule’s law of heating.
(ii) Compute the heat generated while transferring 96000 coulombs of charge in two hours through a potential difference of 40 V.
Answer:
(i) H = I2Ri
(ii) H = V.I.t = V.Q
Given:     V = 40 volts, Q = 96000 C
H = 40 V x 96000 C
= 3.84 x 106 J

Section – D

Question 34.
The position of certain elements in the Modem Periodic Table are shown below.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 15
Using the above table answer the following questions giving reasons in each case:
(i) Which element will form only covalent compounds?
(ii) Which element is a non-metal with valency 2?
(iii) Which element is a metal with valency 2?
(iv) Out of H, C and F which has largest atomic size?
(v) To which family does H, C and F belong?
OR
Define atomic size. Give its unit of measurement. In the modem periodic table what trend is observed in the atomic radius in a group and a period and why is it so?
Answer:
(i) E, it has 4 valence electrons.
(ii) B, it needs only 2 electrons to attain stable configuration.
(iii) D, it loses two electrons to attain stable configuration.
(iv) F, it has the largest size since size increases down the group.
(v) Noble gases, outermost shell is complete.
OR

  • Atomic size is the distance between the centre of the nucleus and the outermost shell of an isolated atom.
  • Picometer /pm
  • Trends in Atomic radius
    In a group: increases down the group; due to addition of a new shell.
    In a period: atomic radius decreases from left to right; due to increase in pulling power of nucleus / due to addition of electrons in the same shell.

Question 35.
(i) What is the law of dominance of traits? Explain with an example.
(ii) Why are the traits acquired during the life time of an individual not inherited? Explain.
Answer:
(i) Law of dominance of traits: In a cross between a pair of contrasting characters, only one parental character will be expressed in F1 generation which is called dominant trait and the other is called a recessive trait.
For example – in pea plants.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 16

All plants in F1 generation were tall proving that the gene for tallness is dominant over the gene for dwarfness/short, which is not able to express itself in the presence of dominant trait.

(ii) Traits acquired by an organism during its lifetime are known as aquired traits. These traits are not inherited because they occur in somatic cells only/do not cause any change in the DNA of the germ cells.

Question 36.
Draw a ray diagram in each of the following cases to show the formation of image, when the object is placed:
(i) between optical centre and principal focus of a convex lens.
(ii) anywhere in front of a concave lens.
(iii) at 2F of convex lens.
State the signs and values of magnifications in the above mentioned cases (i) and (ii).
OR
An object 4.0 cm in size, is placed 25.0 cm in front of a concave mirror of focal length 15.0 cm.
(i) At what distance from the mirror should a screen be placed in order to obtain a sharp image?
(ii) Find the size of the image.
(iii) Draw a ray diagram to show the formation of image in this case.
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 17
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 18
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 19
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 20
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 3 with Solutions 21

Biotechnology and its Applications Class 12 Important Extra Questions Biology Chapter 12

Here we are providing Class 12 Biology Important Extra Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Biotechnology and its Applications. Important Questions for Class 12 Biology are the best resource for students which helps in Class 12 board exams.

Class 12 Biology Chapter 12 Important Extra Questions Biotechnology and its Applications

Biotechnology and its Applications Important Extra Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
What is a transgenic organism?
Answer:
An organism that carries a foreign functional gene in its genome is termed a transgenic organism.

Question 2.
Write two applications of biotechnology.
Answer:

  1. Treatment of diseases.
  2. Preparation of processed fortified food.

Question 3.
What are probes?
Answer:
It is a single-stranded DNA or RNA, tagged with a radioactive molecule, which is complementary to the DNA in a clone of cells. It is used for detecting the presence of nucleotides complementary to the probe.

Question 4.
Name two diseases that can be treated by producing biological compounds in transgenic animals.
Answer:
Cystic fibrosis, rheumatoid arthritis, Alzheimer’s disease, cancer, and emphysema.

Question 5.
Name the toxin produced by Bacillus Thurinsiensis.
Answer:
Bt Toxin.

Question 6.
What is the utility of the Bt-toxin gene?
Answer:
Bt-Toxin gene provides Bt-toxin which is involved in providing resistance to cotton plants against insects.

Question 7.
Bt-toxin protein exists in which form?
Answer:
Inactive protoxins.

Question 8.
How is inactive Bt-toxin converted into active form? (CBSE Outside Delhi 2019)
Answer:
The inactive toxin is converted into active form due to the alkaline pH of the gut of insects which solubilizes the crystal converting the toxin to its active form.

Question 9.
How does Bt toxin cause the death of insects?
Answer:
Activated Bt toxin binds to the surface of midgut epithelial cells and creates pores in it that cause cell swelling and lysis. It finally leads to the death of the insect.

Question 10.
Name a few forms of cry gene.
Answer:
cry I Ac, cry II Ab, cry III Ab, and cry III Bb.

Question 11.
List the specific insects killed by:
(i) cry I Ac and
(ii) cry II Ab.
Answer:
cry I Ac, cry II Ab-both control cotton bollworm.

Question 12.
Name the insects killed by proteins coded by cry III Ab and cry III Bb.
Answer:

  1. Colorado potato beetle
  2. corn rootworm.

Question 13.
What is unique about transgenic animals?
Answer:
Animals that have their DNA manipulated to possess and express a foreign gene are known as transgenic animals. e.g. Rabit, sheep, cows, fish, etc.

Question 14.
How infestation of Meloidogyne incognita was prevented in the Tobacco plant?
Answer:
An infestation of Meloidogyne incognita was prevented on the basis of RNA interference. This method involves the silencing mRNA by complementary dsRNA molecule that binds to mRNA and prevents its translation.

Question 15.
What is the silencing of mRNA?
Answer:
The binding of single-stranded mRNA with complementary and double-stranded RNA to prevent translation of mRNA is called silencing of mRNA.

Question 16.
What is the source of the complementary strand in mRNA silencing?
Answer:

  • Viruses having RNA genomes.
  • Mobiles genetic elements (transposons).

Question 17.
How is dsRNA prepared?
Answer:
Reverse transcription.

Question 18.
Name the genetically engineered insulin.
Answer:
Humulin.

Question 19.
Write the name of the transgenic protein used to treat emphysema.
Answer:
Alpha-1-antitrypsin.

Question 20.
How is Indian basmati unique?
Answer:
It is unique for its aroma and flavor.

Question 21.
What is complementary DNA (cDNA)?
Answer:
DNA synthesized on RNA template with the help of reverse transcriptase.

Question 22.
Mention the chemical change that proinsulin undergoes, to be able to act as mature insulin. (CBSE 2018)
Answer:
The proinsulin is cleaved to remove extra stretch called the C-peptide to form mature insulin having only A-chain and B-chain joined by a disulfide bond.

Question 23.
What is the application of genetically engineered bacterium namely Pseudomonas Putidal?
Answer:
Pseudomonas putida is used for scavenging oil spills by digesting hydrocarbons of crude oil.

Question 24.
How did the first transgenic cows Rosie differ from other cows with respect to the quality of milk? (CBSE 2008)
Answer:
Rosie produced a human protein (alpha-lactalbumin) enriched milk which is nutritionally a more balanced product for human babies.

Question 25.
State the role of C-peptide in human insulin. (CBSE 2014)
Answer:
C-peptide maintains its nature as pro-hormone (pro-insulin) and during maturation, it is removed. Thus proinsulin matures into insulin.

Biotechnology and its Applications Important Extra Questions Short Answer Type

Question 1.
List three critical research areas of biotechnology.
Answer:
Three critical research areas of biotechnology are:

  1. Providing the best catalyst in the form of an improved organism usually a microbe or pure enzyme.
  2. Creating optimal conditions through engineering for a catalyst to act, and
  3. Downstream processing technologies to purify the protein/organic compound.

Question 2.
Give the few characteristics of GMOs. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Genetically modified organisms:

  1. They are capable of producing pharmaceutically useful proteins.
  2. They are capable of producing en¬hanced, modified, or new metabolites.
  3. They can be used for crop protection by control of insects, fungal diseases, frost damage, etc.
  4. They degrade non-biological wastes and detoxify toxic wastes.
  5. They show enhanced nitrogen fixation.

Question 3.
List a few transgenic organisms and their potential application. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Transgenics and their potential applications:

Transgenics Useful Applications
Bt Cotton Pest resistance, herbicide tolerance, and high yield
Flavr Savr Tomato Increased shelf life (delayed ripening) and better nutrient quality.
Golden Rice Vitamin A-rich
Cattles (cow, sheep, goat) Therapeutic human proteins in their milk
pig Organ transplantation without risk of rejection.

Question 4.
In view of the current food crisis, it is said that we need another green revolution. Highlight the major limitations of the earlier green revolution.
Answer:

  1. Excessive use of fertilizers and pesticides which are polluting the water bodies, soil, and food items.
  2. It was related to better management practices that can improve food availability to a limited extent.
  3. Genetic cap for improvement in food yield.

Question 5.
Differentiate between diagnostics and therapeutics. Give one example for each category.
Answer:
Difference between diagnostics and therapeutics:

Diagnostics Therapeutics
1. It finds out the cause and nature of the disease. 1. It treats patients to cure them of the disease.
2. It provides a logical basis for treatment. Example: ELISA test or HIV. 2. It provides relief from the disease. Example: Antibiotic for bacterial infection.

Question 6.
Gene therapy can cure important genetic disorders in humans. Comment.
Answer:
Through the “human genome project,” most human genes and sequences have been identified, genetic disorders such as Eczema, cancer, hemophilia, thalassemia, and cystic fibrosis can be cured by the insertion of correct genes into these patients.

Question 7.
What are the advantages of molecular diagnostic over conventional methods?
Answer:
Advantages of molecular diagnostics:

  1. Early diagnosis is not possible using conventional methods, but by using rDNA technology and PCR, early diagnosis is possible.
  2. It is also a powerful technique to identify many genetic disorders.
  3. It is used to detect mutations in suspected cancer patients.

Question 8.
List two uses of cloned genes in molecular diagnostics.
Answer:

  1. Cloned genes, when expressed to pro¬duce recombinant proteins, help in developing sensitive diagnostic techniques.
  2. Cloned genes are used as probes to detect the presence of its complementary DNA strand; mutated genes will not hybridize with the probe and hence do not appear on the photographic film.

Question 9.
How is early detection of infectious diseases possible by molecular diagnostics?
Answer:
Molecular diagnostic of early detection of infectious diseases:

  1. A low concentration of viral or bacterial DNA in a host body can be detected (much before the symptoms of the disease appear) by polymerase chain reaction (amplification).
  2. Clones of genes can be used as probes to detect the presence of complementary (normal) strands of DNA in a mutant-clone. Hybridization does not occur and hence the radioactivity does not appear in the (autoradiography) photographic films.

Question 10.
How was insulin obtained before the advent of rDNA technology? What were the problems encountered?
Answer:
Before the advent of rDNA technology, insulin was obtained from slaughtered cattle and pigs.
Problems:

  1. Insulin obtained from slaughtered cattle and pigs was slightly different from human insulin. It had a harmful effects over long periods.
  2. The drug has been eliciting an immune response in some patients.

Question 11.
Why has the Indian Parliament cleared the second amendment of the country’s patents bill?
Answer:
The major change in the patent regime achieved through the second amendment is not in the area of medicine and drugs but in the area of seeds and plants, especially genetically engineered seeds. It has opened the flood gates for patenting genetically engineered seeds.

Question 12.
Give any two reasons why the patent on Basmati should not have gone to an American Company.
Answer:

  1. In India, Basmati rice is being cultivated for several years.
  2. American company by producing hybrids of this scented (basmati) rice cannot claim to have the patent rights.

Question 13.
What is a gene library?
Answer:
Gene Library: Several clones of cells each containing one of a few foreign genes are finally obtained, representing almost all the genes of an organism, it is termed the gene library of that organism. From that gene library, it is possible to identify a clone containing the gene of interest.

In order to obtain the gene library of an organism, its genome is first to cut into smaller DNA fragments containing one or a few genes, and such fragments can be cloned in the cell where such a cell multiplies to form a group of cells, all cells have same foreign DNA and are termed clone.

Question 14.
What is a reporter or marker gene?
Answer:
A reporter or marker gene produces a phenotype that is either easily and specifically detected or which allows a differential multiplication of the cells.

Question 15.
Why is the use of probes considered better than conventional diagnostic tools for disease diagnosis?
Answer:
Probes are better than conventional diagnostic tools because:

  1. They are highly specific, relatively rapid, and much simpler.
  2. They are extremely powerful especially when combined with PCR, even a single molecule in the test sample can be detected.
  3. Since the culture of microbe is not required, the risk of accidental infection to laboratory personnel is eliminated.

Question 16.
Name different transfection methods.
Answer:
Calcium phosphate precipitation, direct microinjection, retrovirus infection, lipofection, particle gun delivery, and electroporation.

Question 17.
Why mice are considered the most suitable animals for transgenic production?
Answer:
The mouse is preferred for studies of gene transfers due to its many favorable features like a short estrous cycle and gestation period, production of several offspring per pregnancy, convenient in vitro fertilization, production, and maintenance of embryonic stem cell lines.

Question 18.
Define ‘Germline gene therapy.
Answer:
It is a therapy in which germ cells, i.e. sperms or eggs (even zygotes) are modified by the introduction of functional genes which are ordinarily integrated into their genomes. Therefore, the change due to therapy is heritable and passed on to later generations.

Question 19.
Write the advantages of recombinant therapeutics. How many of them have been approved the world over for human use and how many are available in the Indian market?
Answer:
Advantages of Recombinant Therapeutics:

  1. The recombinant therapeutics do not induce unwanted immunological responses like similar products of non-human origin.
  2. About 30 recombinant therapeutics have been approved the world over.
  3. 12 of them are being marketed in India.

Question 20.
What is interest-sensitive speciesism? Is it one of the ethical issues related to transgenic animals?
Answer:
The use of animals in biotechnological research causes greater suffering to the animals. But most people seem to accept some animal suffering to serve the basic interest and welfare of mankind; this attitude has been termed as interest-sensitive speciesism. It is one of the most common ethical issues.

Question 21.
Name a few useful products obtained from animal cell lines.
Answer:
Useful products obtained from animal cell lines:

  1. Production of vaccines for influenza, measles, and mumps from chick embryo fluid.
  2. Production of vaccines for rabies and rubella from duck embryo fluid.

Question 22.
Can you suggest a method to remove oil (hydrocarbon) from seeds based on your understanding of DNA technology and the chemistry of oil?
Answer:
The genes for the formation of oil in the seed should be identified. The specific gene can be removed by using enzyme restriction endonucleases. Such DNA molecules should be treated with DNA ligases to seal at the broken ends. These cells when grown in a minimum nutrient medium, under aseptic conditions will differentiate into a new plant whose seeds will not have oil in them.

Question 23.
Find out from the Internet what is Golden Rice.
Answer:
Golden Rice. It is genetically engineered rice rich in Vitamin A. It was prepared by introducing three genes involved in the biosynthetic pathway for carotenoid, the precursor of vitamin A. The color of golden rice is yellow due to the synthesis of provitamin A in the entire grain.

Question 24.
Describe the responsibility of GEAC, set up by the Indian Government. (CBSE 2009)
Answer:

  1. Genetic Engineering Approval Committee (GEAC) makes decisions regarding the validity of GM research.
  2. It also ensures the safety of introducing GM organisms for public services.

Question 25.
Why insulin is being extracted from bacteria rather than animal sources?
Or
Name the source from which insulin was extracted earlier. (CBSE 2011)
Answer:
Insulin for the use of diabetic patients was earlier extracted from the pancreas of slaughtered cows and pigs. It caused allergy and other reactions in patients, due to foreign proteins. So these days insulin is being extracted from bacteria.

Question 26.
What are embryonic stem cells? What stages of early embryonic development are important for generating embryonic stem cells?
Answer:
Embryonic stem cells, as their name suggests, are derived from embryos. Most embryonic stem cells are derived from embryos that develop from eggs that have been fertilized in vitro-in an in vitro fertilization clinic and then donated for research purposes with the informed consent of the donors. They are not derived from eggs fertilized in a woman’s body. Embryonic stem cells are obtained from the inner cell mass of the blastocyst stage of the embryo.

Question 27.
Name the first transgenic cow developed and state the improvement in the quality of the product produced by it. (CBSE Sample Paper 2018)
Answer:

  • Name of the first transgenic cow developed: Rosie
  • Advantage: It produced human protein-enriched milk (2.4 grams per liter).

Question 28.
What are cry genes? In which organism are they present? (CBSE 2017)
Answer:
Cry genes code for a toxin that is poisonous to some insects thus making plant insect resistant. They are present in the bacterium Bacillus Thuriengiensis.

Question 29.
Name one toxin gene isolated from B. Thuringiensis and its target pest. (CBSE Delhi 2019 C)
Answer:
Cry I AC is a toxin isolated from B. Thuringiensis and its target pest is cotton bollworm.

Question 30.
Why does the toxin produced by B. Thuringiensis not kill the Bacillus? (CBSE Delhi 2019 C)
Answer:
The toxin produced is in inactive form as protoxin. It does not kill the bacteria and attacks only its target pest because protoxin is activated in the optimum pH medium of the gut of insect pest.

Biotechnology and its Applications Important Extra Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
Expand GMO. How is it different from a hybrid?
Answer:

  • GMO – Genetically modified organism.
  • Differences between GMO and Hybrid.
GMO Hybrid
1. Formation of GMO does not require crossing between different organisms. 1. It is formed as a result of crossing between two different organisms.
2. One or more foreign genes are incorporated into GMOs. 2. It contains complete genomes of two different organisms.
3. A completeLy new trait has been introduced. 3. OnLy the existing traits are improved.

Question 2.
Mention any six fields of application of biotechnology for human welfare.
Answer:
Applications of Biotechnology:

  1. Therapeutics
  2. Genetically modified crops
  3. Molecular diagnostics
  4. Processed food items
  5. Bioremediation
  6. Biological waste treatment
  7. Energy production.

Question 3.
“Specific Bt Toxin gene is incorporated into the cotton plant so as to control the infestation of Bollworm”. Mention the organism from which the gene was isolated and explain its mode of action. (CBSE Sample paper 2019-20)
Answer:

  • Specific Bt toxin genes isolated from Bacillus Thuringiensis are incorporated into cotton. Cry I AC and Cry II AC control the bollworm.
  • Bt gene forms protein crystals that contain a toxin insecticidal protein.
  • It is in an inactive state.
  • The inactive toxin is converted into active form due to the alkaline pH of the gut which solubilizes the crystal.
  • Activated Bt-toxin binds to the surface of midgut epithelial cells and creates pores that cause cell swelling and lysis. It finally leads to the death of the insect.

Question 4.
How is the ELISA test carried out?
Answer:
ELISA (Enzyme-Linked Immunosorbent Assay Test):

  1. It is a technique of detecting a very small amount of protein (antibody or antigen) with the help of enzyme peroxidase or alkaline phosphatase and stain-producing substrates like 5-aminosalicylic acid or orthophenylene diamine.
  2. The serum is sorbed to the surface of the ELISA plate.
  3. An antibody is specific to the antigen for diagnosis placed over an immobilized antigen.
  4. The spot is washed to remove the free antibody.
  5. Antibody bound to the enzyme is poured over the spot so as to react with com¬plex antibody.
  6. The area is washed again to remove the free antibody-enzyme complex.
  7. Chromagen is added. It will produce a stain showing the antigen was present.
  8. ELISA is a quick method of diagnosis of pregnancy (by detection hCG in urine), AIDS, hepatitis, STDs, thyroid disorder, and Rubella virus.

Question 5.
While creating genetically modified organisms, genetic barriers are not respected. How this can be dangerous in the long run?
Answer:

  1. Genetic pollution. The ecological imbalance may occur due to transferring of transgenes from one organism to another.
  2. Formation of Superweeds. Due to the introduction of weedicide genes in crops, there is a danger that any such crop may itself become superweed.
  3. Formation of super insecticides.
  4. Foreign proteins formed with foreign genes may get attacked by the defense system of the organism leading to the formation of defective biochemicals,
  5. Transgenes may exhibit changes in their expressivity after attaining certain age and change in environment.

Question 6.
Explain the structure of Insulin. How insulin is synthesized in humans (or mammals)? (CBSE Outside Delhi 2011) Answer:
(i) Insulin is made up of two short polypeptide chains; A and chain B which are linked together by disulfide bridges.

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Biotechnology and its Applications 1
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Biotechnology and its Applications 2
(A), (B) Conversion of proinsulin after removal of C-peptide.

(ii) Insulin is synthesized as pro-hormone (i.e. which is to be processed before becoming functional) which contains an extra stretch called C-peptide which is usually removed during the maturation of insulin.

Question 7.
Explain the social, economical, and environmental implications of genetic engineering techniques.
Answer:

  1. Genetically prepared human insulin and edible vaccines will be readily available and also will be economical.
  2. Transgenic crop plants for human consumption may cause concern for safety due to unwanted properties they may have.
  3. Some people believe that transgenic plants and animals can solve many human problems especially hunger and disease.

Question 8.
Write a short note on:
(i) Production of human growth hormone by E. coli.
Answer:
Production of human growth hormone by E. coli. The Human growth hormone is produced commercially by transgenic Escherichia coli. The pituitary gland of humans produces growth hormones that regulate growth and development. However, in children stunted growth occurs due to deficiency of the hormone called pituitary dwarfism. For this, the hGH is now available as a recombinant protein.

The high-coding DNA sequence is linked with the bacterial signal sequence of E. coli. The hGH is secreted into the periplasmic space of bacterial cells by the signal peptides wherefrom the protein is purified.

(ii) Animals as organ donors for humans.
Answer:
Animals as organ donors for humans. Organ transplantation from animals to humans is called xenotransplantation. The first experiment was done in 1906 by French Surgeon Mathieu Jaboulay who implanted a pig’s kidney into one woman and a goat’s liver into another woman, but it was not successful.

Though now, organ transplantation from animals has been made possible in America and the United Kingdom. Of all, baboons and pigs have favored xenotransplant donors. Pig organs have been transplanted to humans several times in the last few years. Baboons are genetically close to humans, so they are most often used. Six baboon kidneys were transplanted into humans in 1964. Today, however, xenotransplantation is still experimental and there is a serious risk to the procedures.

(iii) Plant Variety Protection and Farmers’ Right Act.
Answer:
Plant Variety Protection and Farmers’ Right Act. This act provides the establishment of an effective system for the protection of plant breeder’s rights. It gives concurrent attention to the right of farmers, breeders and researchers, and the protection of public interest. Public interest is related to issues like compulsory licensing of rights and to the import of varieties incorporating Genetic Use Restriction Technology.

Question 9.
Explain the following terms in one or two sentences: intellectual property rights, humulin, and biofortified foods.
Answer:
1. Intellectual Property Rights: It is the general term covering patents, copyright, trademark, industrial designs, geographical indications, protection of layout designs of integrated circuits, and protection of undisclosed information (trade secrets).

2. Humulin: It is a crystalline suspension of human insulin. It is made using a chemical process called recombinant DNA technology and is of various types (Humulin R, U, N, L, 70/30, 50/50) depending on the percentage of insulin present in suspension. Humulin does not come from human beings, but they are synthesized in special non¬disease producing special lab strains of E. coli which are genetically altered by the addition of the gene for human insulin production. Humulin is identical in chemical structure to human insulin and is made in a factory by recombinant DNA technology.

3. Biofortified foods: They are the modified food rich in nutritional values. Biofortification is the process of breeding food crops that are rich in bioavailable micronutrients. These crops fortify themselves, they toad high levels of minerals and vitamins in their seeds and roots, which are harvested and eaten.

Question 10.
What are transgenic bacteria? Illustrate using any one example.
Answer:
Those bacteria whose DNA is manipulated to possess and express an extra (foreign) gene are known as transgenic bacteria.
Example: Human Growth hormone production by transgenic Escherichia coli.

  1. The pituitary gland of humans produces growth hormones that regulate growth and development.
  2. However, in children stunted growth occurs due to deficiency of the hormone which is called pituitary dwarfism.
  3. For this, the hGH is now available as a recombinant protein.
  4. The hGH-coding DNA sequence is linked with the bacterial signal sequence of E. coli.
  5. The hGH is secreted into the periplasmic space of bacterial cells by the signal peptides wherefrom the protein is purified.

Question 11.
Write properties of stem cells. How is the population of stem cells maintained?
Answer:
Properties of stem cells:
The classical definition of a stem cell requires that it possess two properties:

  1. Self-renewal: The ability to go through numerous cycles of cell division while maintaining the undifferentiated state,
  2. Potency: The capacity to differentiate into specialized cell types. In the strictest sense, this requires stem cells to be either totipotent or pluripotent- to be able to give rise to any mature cell type, although multipotent or unipotent progenitor cells are sometimes referred to as stem cells. Apart from this, it is said that stem cell function is regulated in a feedback mechanism.

1. Self-renewal:
Two mechanisms exist to ensure that a stem cell population is maintained:

  • Obligatory asymmetric replication: A stem cell divides into one mother cell that is identical to the original stem cell, and another daughter cell that is differentiated.
  • Stochastic differentiation: When
    one stem cell develops into two differentiated daughter cells, another stem cell undergoes mitosis and produces two stem cells identical to the original.

2. Totipotency
They have the potential to develop into any cell found in the human body.

Question 12.
Show with a simple sketch the location of stem cells and their role in treatment.
Answer:
Stem cells:
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Biotechnology and its Applications 3
Diseases and conditions where stem cell treatment is being investigated.

Question 13.
(i) Why are transgenic animals so called?
Answer:
Animals that have had their DNA manipulated to possess and express (foreign) genes are called transgenic animals.
Example: Transgenic mice, transgenic rabbits.

(ii) Explain the role of transgenic animals in (a) vaccine safety (b) biological products with the help of an example for each.
Answer:
(a) Role of transgenic animals in vaccine safety:

  • Transgenic mice are being developed for use in testing the safety of vaccines before they are used on humans.
  • Transgenic mice are being used to test the safety of the polio vaccine.

(b) Role of transgenic animals in biological products: In 1997, the first transgenic cow, Rosie, produced human protein-enriched milk of 2.4 gm per liter. The milk contained the human alpha-lactalbumin and was a more balanced product for human babies.

Question 14.
Name the genes responsible for making Bt cotton plants resistant to bollworm attack. How do such plants attain resistance against bollworm attacks? Explain. (CBSE 2012)
Answer:

  1. Genes for making Bt cotton resistant to bollworm attack:
    1. acrylic
    2. cry IIAb
  2. Specific Bt toxin genes are isolated from Bacillus Thurinsiensis and incorporated into the cotton plant.
  3. The toxin is coded by a gene name cry.
  4. The protein synthesized by these is insecticidal protein. It is present as an inactive protoxin.
  5. Once the insect ingests the protoxin it is converted into the active form of toxin due to the alkaline medium of the gut.
  6. The activated toxin binds to the surface of midgut epithelial cells and creates pores in them.
  7. It causes swelling and breakdown and eventually leads to the death of the insect.

Question 15.
Explain the various steps involved in the production of artificial insulin. (CBSE 2017)
Or
Explain how Eli Lilly, an American company, produced insulin by recombinant DNA technology. (CBSE Delhi 2018C)
Answer:
Genetically engineered insulin:

  1. Insulin contains two short polypeptide chains: chain A and chain Blinked together by disulfide bridges.
  2. In mammals, insulin is synthesized as a pro-hormone. It contains an extra stretch called C-peptide.
  3. C-peptide is absent in the mature insulin and is removed during maturation into insulin.
  4. Production of insulin by rDNA techniques was achieved by an American company, Eli Lilly in 1983. It prepared two DNA sequences corresponding to A and B, chains of human insulin, and introduced them in plasmids of E. coli for production.
  5. The Aand B chains produced were separated, extracted and combined, by creating disulfide bonds to form human insulin.

Question 16.
(i) What are transgenic animals?
Answer:
Animals whose DNA has been manipulated to possess and express an extra/foreign gene are known as transgenic animals.

(ii) Name the transgenic animal having the largest number amongst all the existing transgenic animals.
Answer:
Mice

(iii) Mention any three purposes for which these animals are produced. (CBSE Delhi 2018C)
Answer:
(a) Transgenic animals are designed to allow the study of how genes are regulated and how they affect the normal functions of the body and its developments, e.g. information is obtained as to how insulin has a role as a growth factor.
(b) Transgenic animals are designed to increase our understanding of how genes control the development of diseases; they serve as models for human diseases.
(c) Transgenic mice are being developed to test the safety of vaccines, e.g. polio vaccine has been tested on mice.

Question 17.
Explain the following terms in not more than 70 words.
(i) Single-cell proteins (SCP)
Answer:
Cells from different kinds of organisms such as bacteria, filamentous fungi, yeast, and algae are treated in different ways so that they are used as food or feed, are called single-cell protein. The biomass is obtained from both unicellular and multicellular microorganisms. The common substrate used for preparing such food containing SCP ranges from whey sawdust, and paddy straw. SCP provides a valuable protein-rich supplement in the human diet.

(ii) Biopatent
Answer:
A patent is a right granted by a Government to an inventor to prevent others to make commercial use of such an invention. At present patents that are granted for biological entities and the various products obtained from these organisms, are termed as biopatent.

Biopatents are being granted for the following:
(1) Strains of microorganisms
(2) Cell lines
3) Genetically modified strains of living organisms
(4) DNA sequences
(5) The proteins prepared by DNA sequences
(6) Biotechnological process
(7) Production process
(8) Products
(9) Product application.

(iii) Bioethics
Answer:
Bioethics is a set of standards that may be used to regulate our activities in relation to biological works.

The major bioethical concerns are as follows:
(a) Introduction of transgenes from one species to another violates the integrity of species.
(b) Transfer of human genes to other animals and vice versa is against ethics.
(c) Making of the clone.
(d) May cause risk to biodiversity.
(e) Suffering from animals used in biotechnology will increase.

(iv) Biopiracy
Answer:
The exploitation of patent biological resources without proper permission is called biopiracy. The collection of such material without a benefit-sharing agreement is likely to find its way into the list of criminal violations in many countries.

(v) Genetically modified food
Answer:
The food prepared from the production of genetically modified crops is called genetically modified food (GM food). It contains proteins produced by a transgene.

Question 18.
Briefly explain why are Transgenic animals produced? (CBSE Delhi 2013)
Answer:
Transgenic animals:
Transgenic animals are produced for the following purposes:

  1. Transgenic animals are designed to allow the study of how genes are regulated and how they affect the normal functions of the body and its developments, e.g. information is obtained as to how insulin has a role as a growth factor.
  2. Transgenic animals are designed to increase our understanding of how genes control the development of diseases; they serve as models for human diseases.
  3. Transgenic animals that produce useful biological compounds are created by introducing a portion of the DNA that codes for that product, e.g. a-1 antitrypsin is produced for curing emphysema.
  4. Transgenic mice are being developed to test the safety of vaccines, e.g. polio vaccine has been tested on mice.
  5. Transgenic animals with more sensitivity to toxic substances are being developed to test the toxicity of drugs.

Question 19.
Describe the hazards of transgenic animals.
Answer:
Hazards of transgenic animals:

  1. Proteins: Genes introduced in various organisms operate through the synthesis of polypeptide proteins and enzymes. However, foreign proteins are generally attacked by the defense system resulting in damaged biochemicals which may prove harmful and in the long term produce allergy.
  2. Human organs: Replaceable human organs like kidneys, liver, heart, pancreas, etc. can be obtained only from autografts and isografts. Will it be ethical to grow the human body, human body organs for obtaining the required organs?
  3. Human cloning: This can solve the problem of infertility. However, such a method of human reproduction will destroy the family system, fine human feelings, and the fabric of human society.
  4. Recreation: It is not only a fancy but also the desires of numerous children, adults, and elders to see dinosaurs live.

Question 20.
Compare and contrast the advantages and disadvantages of the production of genetically modified crops.
Or
Write advantage of GM crops. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2019)
Answer:
The advantages of the production of genetically modified crops are:

  1. They have proved to be extremely valuable tools in studies on plant molecular biology, regulation of gene action, identification of regulatory/ promontory sequences.
  2. Genetically modified crops have improved agronomic and other features such as resistance to biotic and abiotic stresses.
  3. Over-ripening losses can be reduced, e.g. flavor saves tomato.
  4. Nutritional values are improved, e.g. Golden rice has high vitamin A content.
  5. Viral resistance can be introduced.
  6. The number of pharmaceuticals like insulin, interferon, blood clotting factors are improved.
  7. Insect resistance can be introduced, e.g. cry gene can be introduced into cotton, wheat, and rice from Bacillus Thuringiensis.

The main disadvantages of the production of genetically modified crops are:

  1. Many transgenes are expressed at low levels which usually limit their usefulness.
  2. Sometimes, the expression of transgenes is suppressed in transgenic plants, this is called gene silencing.
  3. The undesirable features are also carried along with desirable features in transgenic plants such as necrosis, reduced growth, sterility, etc.
  4. Genetic pollution can be there.
  5. Weeds also become resistant.
  6. Bt cotton, Bt wheat also destroy pollinators and disseminators.
  7. The product of transgene may be allergic or toxic.

Question 21.
Why is the introduction of genetically engineering lymphocyte into an ADA deficiency patient, not a permanent cure? Suggest a possible permanent cure. (CBSE 2010, 2011)
Or
Explain how a hereditary disease can be corrected? Give an example of the first successful attempt made towards this objective. (CBSE 2011, 2019 C)
Or
Explain enzyme replacement therapy to treat ADA deficiency. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2016, 2019 C)
Or
What is gene therapy? Illustrate using the example of adenosine deaminase (ADA) deficiency? (CBSE Delhi 2011, 2013, 2016)
Or
Two children A and B aged 4 and 5 years respectively visited a hospital with a similar genetic disorder. Girl A was provided enzyme-replacement therapy and was advised to revisit periodically for further treatment. Girl B was, however, given therapy that did not require a revisit for further treatment.
(a) Name the ailments the two girls were suffering from.
(b) Why did the treatment provided to girl A require repeated visits?
(c) How was girl B cured permanently? (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Gene Therapy. It is defined as the introduction of a normal functional gene into cells that contain the defective allele of the concerned gene with the objective of correcting a genetic disorder or an acquired disorder.

Treatment of ADA deficiency:

  1. Gene therapy was used to correct the genetic disorder called Severe Combined Immunodeficiency (SCID) syndrome produced by adenosine deaminase (ADA) deficiency.
  2. In this, Normal ADA gene copies were produced by cloning.
  3. Packed into a retrovirus, most of the viral genes were replaced by the ADA gene.
  4. Lymphocytes were isolated from the patients.
  5. Recombinant DNA of the recombinant retroviruses was used to infect the lymphocytes.
  6. The infected cells expressing the ADA gene were injected back into the patients.
  7. The normal ADA gene was then expressed in the patients and ADA deficiency is partially corrected. If the gene isolated from bone marrow cells producing ADA is introduced into embryonic cells at early stages, it could provide a permanent cure.

Question 22.
How is the transgenic tobacco plant protected against Meloidogyne incognita? Explain the process? (CBSE 2009)
Or
Explain the process of RNA interference. (CBSE Delhi 2011, 2016)
Or
How has the use of Agrobacterium as vectors helped in controlling Meloidogyne incognita infestation in tobacco plants? Explain in the correct sequence. (CBSE 2018, Sample paper 2020)
Answer:
Protection of tobacco plant against Nematodes, Meloidogyne incognita:

  1. A nematode Meloidogyne incognita infects tobacco plants and reduces their yield.
  2. The specific genes (in the form of cDNA) from the parasite are introduced into the plant using Agrobacterium as the vector.
  3. The genes are introduced in such a way that both sense/coding RNA and antisense RNA (Complementary to the sense/coding RNA) are produced.
  4. Since these two RNAs are complementary, they form a double-stranded RNA (ds RNA)
  5. This neutralizes the specific RNA of the nematode, by a process called RNA- interference.
  6. As a result, the parasite cannot live in the transgenic host, and the transgenic plant is protected from the pest.

Question 23.
What are the ethical concerns of biotechnology?
Answer:

  1. Biotechnology is producing newer genotypes. Some of them can be extremely harmful due to intragenomic interactions and mutations.
  2. It introduces unfamiliar proteins into transgenics which may react to form toxins and allergens.
  3. The genes introduced into crops can pass into weeds through pollen transfer. It will produce superweeds.
  4. It is going to cause genetic pollution which is likely to disturb natural balance in a big way.
  5. Animals employed in experiments of biotechnology are made to suffer.
  6. Animals being used to produce particular structures and pharmaceutical proteins are reduced to the status of factories.
  7. As a gene is introduced from outside into an organism, its integrity as a species is violated.
  8. Transfer of genes from human beings to specific animals or vice-versa violates the concept of humanness.
  9. Biotechnology has no respect for living beings. Its only goal is to exploit them for commercial use in benefitting human society.
  10. In their race to gain supremacy over others, companies and individuals are rushing for biopatents even of those products which are produced through the traditional knowledge of tribals, communities, and societies.

Question 24.
The Green Revolution succeeded in increasing the yield of crops but it is not sufficient to feed the growing human population. Thus there is a need for another green revolution.
(i) Name the technique which will help in increasing the yield of crops.
Answer:
Genetic engineering (Recombinant DNA technology).

(ii) Name any two genetically modified crops.
Answer:
(a) Bt cotton
(b) ‘Flavr Savr Tomato’

(iii)What is golden Rice’?
Answer:
Golden rice is a transgenic variety of rice (Oryza sativa) that contains good quantities of (3-carotene (provitamin A – inactive state of vitamin). Since the grains of the rice are yellow in color due to [3-carotene, the rice is called golden rice.

(iv) Name a natural genetic engineer.
Answer:
Agrobacterium tumefaciens.

Question 25.
How have transgenic animals proved to be beneficial in:
(i) Production of biological products
(ii) Chemical safety testing. (CBSE 2014)
Answer:
(i) Production of biological products:
(a) Medicines required for treating human diseases are obtained by genetic engineering.
(b) a-1-antitrypsin used to treat emphysema.
(c) Transgenic cow ‘Rosie’ produces human-protein enriched milk.
(ii) Chemical safety (Toxicity/safety testing) Transgenic animals are made that carry genes that make these more sensitive toxic substances than non-transgenic animals.

Question 26.
List the disadvantages of insulin obtained from the pancreas of slaughtered cows and pigs.
Answer:

  1. A slaughtered animal produces very little hormone so that the demand was always higher than the supply.
  2. It is unethical to slaughter animals for obtaining the drug.
  3. Contamination was quite common.
  4. The immune response is common.

Question 27.
List the advantages of recombinant insulin.
Answer:

  1. Recombinant insulin is exactly similar to human insulin and is, therefore, also called humulin.
  2. It is available in pure form with little chances of contamination.
  3. There is no slaughtering of animals.
  4. There is no immune response or any other side effect.
  5. There is enough manufacturing capacity so that the chances of short supply are few.

Question 28.
Explain the process of synthesis of insulin.
Answer:
Production of human insulin: Gene transfer involves essentially the following stages:

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Biotechnology and its Applications 4
Steps involved in gene transfer for the production of human insulin:

  1. Isolation of donor or DNA segment. A useful DNA segment is isolated from the donor organism.
  2. Formation of Recombined DNA (rDNA). Both the vector and donor DNA segments are cut in the presence of restriction endonuclease. In the presence of ligase DNA segments of both are joined to form rDNA.
  3. Production of Multiple Copies of rDNA. The next step in the process is the production of multiple copies of this recombinant DNA.
  4. Introduction of rDNA in the recipient organism. This rDNA is inserted into a recipient organism.
  5. Screening of the transformed cells. The recipient (host) cells are screened for the presence of rDNA and the product of the donor gene. The transformed cells are separated and multiplied, using an economical method for its mass production.

Ecosystem Class 12 Important Extra Questions Biology Chapter 14

Here we are providing Class 12 Biology Important Extra Questions and Answers Chapter 14 Ecosystem. Important Questions for Class 12 Biology are the best resource for students which helps in Class 12 board exams.

Class 12 Biology Chapter 14 Important Extra Questions Ecosystem

Ecosystem Important Extra Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
What is an ecosystem?
Answer:
Ecosystem. It is a functional unit of nature where living organisms interact among themselves and also with the physical environment.

Question 2.
Who coined the term ecosystem?
Answer:
Sir Arthur Tansley (1935).

Question 3.
Name two major kinds of ecosystems.
Answer:

  1. Terrestrial ecosystem.
  2. Aquatic ecosystem.

Question 4.
Write three examples of terrestrial ecosystems.
Answer:
Forests, grasslands, and deserts ecosystem.

Question 5.
Give one example of the smallest and another of large-sized ecosystems.
Answer:

  1. Pond
  2. Forest.

Question 6.
Give three examples of freshwater ecosystems.
Answer:
Ponds, Lakes, and Streams ecosystems.

Question 7.
Name two saltwater ecosystems.
Answer:
Marine and estuaries ecosystems.

Question 8.
Name two man-made ecosystems.
Answer:

  1. Spacecrafts
  2. Aquarium
  3. Crop field.

Question 9.
Write two examples where man has interfered in the ecosystem.
Answer:

  1. Cutting of forests
  2. Construction of dams.

Question 10.
How do decomposers obtain food?
Answer:
Decomposers release their enzymes into dead and decaying plants and animal remains and absorb the simple inorganic substances.

Question 11.
Give two examples where there is the transfer of matter from terrestrial to the aquatic ecosystem or vice-versa.
Answer:

  1. Dropping of leaves of riverbank trees into the water.
  2. Terrestrial birds diving into the water to catch fish.

Question 12.
Write the equation that helps in deriving the net primary productivity of an ecosystem. (CBSE Delhi 2013)
Or
How will you calculate net productivity?
Answer:
GPP – R = NPP

Gross primary productivity – Respiratory processes (loss) = Net primary productivity
Or
Net primary productivity = Gross productivity – respiration loss.

Question 13.
Why are green plants not found beyond certain depths in the ocean? (CBSE 2011)
Answer:
The sunlight cannot penetrate beyond certain depths in the ocean.

Question 14.
Why are green algae not likely to be found in the deepest strata of the ocean? (CBSE Outside Delhi 2013)
Answer:
Green algae are not likely to be found in the deepest strata of the sea because the environment is perpetually dark and the sun as a source of energy is not available.

Question 15.
Name two aquatic ecosystems which have a rich diversity of macrophytes.
Answer:
Wetlands and lakes.

Question 16.
Name two structural features of the ecosystem.
Answer:

  1. Species composition
  2. Stratification.

Question 17.
How does the standing state of nutrients differ?
Answer:
The standing state of nutrients differs from one ecosystem to another or with the season in the same ecosystem.

Question 18.
Define detritus.
Answer:
Dead plant and animal remains are called detritus.

Question 19.
Name above ground and below ground detritus.
Answer:

  1. Dried plant parts and dead animals.
  2. Dead roots (root detritus).

Question 20.
What is nutrient immobilization?
Answer:
Soil nutrient gets tied up with biomass of microbes and is not available for other organisms.

Ecosystem Important Extra Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
List the abiotic components of an ecosystem.
Answer:
The abiotic components of an ecosystem are of four types:

  1. Inorganic substances like C, N2, O2, C02, H20, etc.;
  2. Organic compounds like carbohydrates, proteins lipids, etc.;
  3. Climatic factors (including temperature, light, wind, gases, humidity, rain, and water) (also wave action, water currents),
  4. the edaphic factor which includes soil.

Question 2.
List the differences between biotic and abiotic components of the ecosystem.
Answer:
Differences between Biotic and Abiotic Components of the ecosystem:

Biotic components Abiotic components
1. Biotic components of an ecosystem are those Living organisms that are different members of a community. 1. Abiotic components are non-living factors.
2. Biotic components of an ecosystem are:
(i) Producers
(ii) Consumers
(iii) Decomposers.
2. It includes water, minerals, salts, humidity, light, temperature, pH, wind, topography, and background.

Question 3.
List the kinds of ecosystems.
Answer:
An ecosystem can be as small as an aquarium in the house or as big as an ocean. The biotic community is spread everywhere. Land, water, and air show the presence of living things.

The major ecosystems of the world are:

Aquatic ecosystem Terrestrial ecosystem Man-made ecosystem
[A] Marine
(i) Oceans
(ii) Seashore
(iii) Brackish[B] Fresh Water
(i) Lakes and rivers
(ii) Spring and ponds
(iii) Swamp
[A] Forest
(i) TropicaL
(ii) Temperate
(iii) Taiga[B] Grassland
(i) Tropical
(ii) Temperate[C] Desert
[D] Tundra
(i) Aquarium
(ii) Crop fields
(iii) Spaceship
(iv) Garden and parks
(v) Small fishery tanks
(vi) Animal husbandry
(vii) Dams and reservoirs

Question 4.
Show the processes involved in the decomposition of detritus.
Or
Describe the process of decomposition of detritus under the following heads: Fragmentation, Leaching, Catabolism, Humification, and Mineralisation. (CBSE 2010)
Answer:
Process of decomposition:

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 14 Ecosystem 1Processes involved in the decomposition of detritus

  1. Fragmentation: Detrivores break down detritus in small particles.
  2. Leaching: Water-soluble inorganic nutrients seep inside the soil and get precipitated as unavailable salt.
  3. Catabolism: Here, bacteria and fungus degrade detritus by their enzymes into simple inorganic ions.
  4. Humification: Formation of hummus at a slow rate.
  5. Mineralization: Release of minerals from humus by microbes.

Question 5.
What are the functions of the ecosystem?
Answer:
Functions of the ecosystem. Ecosystems possess a natural tendency to persist. This is made possible by a variety of functions (activities undertaken to ensure persistence) performed by the structural components.

The key functions of the ecosystem are:

  • Productivity;
  • Energy flow;
  • Nutrient cycling;
  • Decomposition

Question 6.
What is a food chain? List the kinds of food chains.
Answer:
Food Chain: A nutritive interaction among biotic communities (organisms) involving a producer, various levels of consumers, and a decomposer forms a food chain. Each step in a food chain is called a trophic level. Kinds of the food chain. There are 3 kinds of food chains: predator, parasitic and saprophytic chains.

Question 7.
In relation to energy transfer in the ecosystem, explain the statement “10 kg of deer’s meat is equivalent to 1 kg of lion’s flesh”.
Answer:
Passage of food energy from lower trophic level to higher trophic level follows 10% law. 10% law states that only 10% of total energy is transmitted from one trophic level to another. The rest of the energy is dissipated. A lion feeds on deer (lower trophic level). So 10 kg of meat of deer will form only 1 kg of lion’s flesh. The rest of the food energy present in deer meat is wasted and dissipated.

Question 8.
Primary productivity varies from ecosystem to ecosystem. Explain.
Answer:
Primary productivity depends upon the producers (plant species), their photosynthetic potential, soil, climate, and other environmental factors of an ecosystem. They are seldom similar in different ecosystems. Therefore, primary productivity varies from ecosystem to ecosystem.

Question 9.
What is an incomplete ecosystem? Explain with the help of a suitable example.
Answer:
An ecosystem comprises biotic and abiotic components. Abiotic components include light, air, water, temperature, humidity, etc., while biotic factor comprises all living organisms. The absence or limited availability of any component (either abiotic or biotic) makes an ecosystem incomplete like the profundal and benthic zones in an aquatic ecosystem.

Question 10.
What are the shortcomings of ecological pyramids in the study of ecosystems?
Answer:
Ecological pyramids are the graphical representation of ecological parameters. These are characterized by a pyramid of the number, the pyramid of mass, and the pyramid of energy in an ecosystem. The assumption of a simple food chain is the major shortcoming of ecological pyramids.

If we do not provide a food web, a clear position of the trophic levels of an organism cannot be given. Saprophytic organisms are not given any place in the ecological pyramid, though they are an important component in an ecosystem.

Question 11.
Write a note on secondary productivity.
Answer:
Secondary productivity. It refers to synthesized biomass at different trophic levels beginning from primary consumer level to top-level carnivores. At each consumer level, a part of the energy is used for respiration and a part of it is stored. If there is more storage than consumption, the biomass of the population would be higher at the end of a time period than at the beginning. This rate of increase in biomass of heterotrophs is called secondary productivity.

Question 12.
Sketch Pyramid of energy. Why is pyramid energy upright? (CBSE Delhi 2019 C)
Answer:
A pyramid of energy is always upright: It is a graphic representation of energy, amount of energy trapped per unit time, and area in different trophic levels of a food chain with producers forming the base and top consumer at the top.
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 14 Ecosystem 2
An ideal pyramid of energy. Observe that primary producers convert only 1% of the energy from the sunlight available to them into NPP.

There is the unidirectional flow of energy in a food chain. As the energy passes from one trophic level to a higher trophic level along the food chain, its amount decreases. So, the pyramid of energy is always upright.

Question 13.
Construct a pyramid of biomass starting with phytoplankton. Label its three trophic levels. Is the pyramid upright or inverted? Justify your answer. (CBSE Sample Paper 2020)
Answer:
A pyramid of biomass is an aquatic ecosys¬tem and is always inverted. The biomass of primary producer (PP) phytoplankton is smaller than the biomass of zooplankton. The latter constitute primary consumers (PC). The biomass of carnivores, i.e. fish, a secondary consumer (SC), is more than the biomass of the primary consumer. So the pyramid of the biomass of the aquatic ecosystem is inverted.

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 14 Ecosystem 3Pyramid of biomass

Question 14.
What is eco-succession? Write its kinds and pattern.
Answer:
A continuous change in a biotic community is called biotic or eco-succession. A stage of climax is also achieved in the process of succession. Succession is of two types primary and secondary. The pattern of succession in any community is decided by pre-existing conditions of that place.

Three kinds of patterns have been observed:

  1. Xerosere,
  2. Hydrosere and
  3. Merosere.

Question 15.
What are the causes of ecological succession?
Answer:

  • Biotic and physiographic factors operating simultaneously are the causes of ecological succession.
  • Biotic factors, direct succession, and physiographic factors include the climate and other physical factors such as erosion of hills, filling up of lakes and streams.

Question 16.
Give a generalized mode of ecosystem nutrient cycling.
Answer:
A generalized model of ecosystem nutrient cycling:

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 14 Ecosystem 4

A generalized model of ecosystem nutrient cycling: Nutrients are brought in (input), moved out (output), and cycled internally in the ecosystem. Boxes represent ecosystem components and arrows show the pathways of nutrient transfers.

Question 17.
Where would you look for signs of secondary succession? When does secondary succession end?
Answer:
Secondary succession occurs where an early community has been damaged leaving a few organisms and considerable organic matter. A destroyed grassland, destroyed forest, or destroyed area by fire or floods will be the site for secondary succession. The development of climax forests marks the end of secondary succession. A destroyed grassland takes 50 to 100 years to recuperate and a destroyed forest takes 200 years to fully recover.

Question 18.
Name the pioneer and the climax species in a waterbody. Mention the changes observed in the biomass and biodiversity of the successive serai communities developing in the waterbody. (CBSE 2009)
Answer:

  1. Pioneer communities are the small phytoplankton, which is replaced with time by rooted-submerged plants, rooted-floating angiosperms followed by free-floating plants, then reed swamp, marsh-meadow, scrub, and finally the trees.
  2. The climax again is forest.

Ecosystem Important Extra Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
What is an ecosystem? Write its main components.
Answer:
Ecosystem. A stable, self-supporting ecological unit resulting from an interaction between a biotic community (living organisms) and its abiotic environment is called an ecosystem.

An ecosystem comprises two main components:

  1. biotic including plants, animals, and microorganisms and
  2. abiotic mainly including substratum, water, minerals, temperature, carbon dioxide, and oxygen. It must also receive a constant supply of energy (light).

Question 2.
Briefly describe the biotic components of an ecosystem.
Answer:
Biotic components: Of an ecosystem’s biotic components, the plants are producers as they introduce food materials and energy into the living world. The animals are consumers because they get food and energy by consuming plants directly thus called primary consumers (herbivores); secondary/ tertiary consumers (carnivores) obtain energy and food indirectly from plants, and microorganisms are decomposers for they flourish by breaking dead organic matter to simple substances that are returned to environment for reuse by plants.

In an ecosystem, nutrients are used again and again in a cyclic manner, whereas energy trapped from sunlight is lost as heat.

Question 3.
Give an account of factors affecting the rate of decomposition.
Answer:
Factors affecting decomposition:

  1. The upper layer of soil is the main site of decomposition processes in the ecosystem.
  2. The rate of decomposition of detritus is affected by climatic factors and the chemical quality of detritus.
  3. Temperature and soil moisture affect the activities of root microbes.
  4. The chemical quality of detritus is determined by the relative proportion of water-soluble substances, polyphenols, lignin, and nitrogen.

Question 4.
List the important differences between producers and decomposers.
Answer:
Differences between producers and decomposers:

Producers Decomposers
(i) These are organisms that synthesize their own food by the process of photosynthesis. These are also called autotrophs. (i) These organisms feed on the dead bodies of plants and animals.
(ii) They convert the raw materials in the earth and water into carbohydrates which give them food. (ii) They enrich the earth with raw materials trapped in dead bodies of plants and animals.
(iii) They are dependent on decomposers for soil nutrients. (iii) They are dependent on plants and animals for their food.

Question 5.
Explain the terms standing crop, biomass, and standing state.
Or
State what does a standing crop of a trophic level represent? (CBSE Outside Delhi 2013)
Answer:
Standing crop: Each trophic level has a certain mass of living material at a particular time called the standing crop. Biomass. The standing crop is measured as the mass of living organisms (biomass) or the number in a unit area. The biomass of a species is expressed in terms of fresh or dry weight. Measurement of biomass in terms of dry weight is more accurate as the moisture content of biomass fluctuates greatly.

Standing State: Organisms need a constant supply of nutrients to grow, reproduce and regulate various body functions. The amount of nutrients, such as carbon, nitrogen, phosphorus, calcium, etc. present in the soil at any given time, is referred to as the standing state. It varies in different kinds of ecosystems and also on a seasonal basis.

Question 6.
Give a diagrammatic representation of trophic levels in an ecosystem.
Answer:
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 14 Ecosystem 5
Diagrammatic representation of trophic levels in an ecosystem.

Question 7.
Sometimes due to biotic/abiotic factors, the climax remains in a particular serai stage (pre-climax) without reaching climax. Do you agree with this statement? If yes give a suitable example.
Answer:
Sometimes pre-climax stage remains in a particular serai stage without reaching the climax because during ecological succession any change in abiotic and biotic components may affect the particular serai stage, leading to the pre-climax stage before the climax is achieved.

This type of condition occurs in the presence of seeds and other propagules. This secondarily based area may be invaded by moss or exotic weeds thus exhibiting succession seriously and the climax community is never regenerated.

Question 8.
Explain the meaning of the food web and illustrate with a ray diagram.
Answer:
Food web. In nature, the food chains are not strictly linear, but are interrelated and interconnected with one another. Generally, the various food chains in a community are so interlinked as to form a sort of web. As a result, one animal may be a link in more than one food chain.

A network of food chains in a community is referred to as a food web. A food web may have all or some of the three types of food chains, i.e. detritus, predator, and parasitic. The food webs become more complicated because of the variability of taste and preference, availability and compulsion, and several other factors at each level. For example, tigers normally do not eat fish or crab, but they are forced to feed on them in the Sundarbans.

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 14 Ecosystem 6

Question 9.
Starting from a bare rock or a site of volcanic eruption, trace the organisms that participate in the process of succession. (CBSE Delhi 2011)
Or
Describe the process of succession on a base rock. (CBSE 2012)
Answer:

  1. Simple organisms appear first of all on such an exposed site as lichens. Lichens make conditions suitable for mosses (bryophytes).
  2. Gradually a variety of complex organisms join the community.Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 14 Ecosystem 7
    Stages of biotic succession.
  3. Finally, large plants, trees, etc. appeared. It can be illustrated that lichens are pioneers, followed by mosses, annual grasses, perennial herbs, shrubs, and finally trees along with their characteristic animal populations.

Question 10.
How does succession differ in terrestrial and aquatic systems? Give salient points. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Differences between terrestrial and aquatic succession:

Succession on land/rock Succession In Water
1. lichens and mosses are the pioneer community. 1. Phytoplankton is a pioneer community.
2. Soil is formed by the action of lichens. 2. Waterbodies are prone to silting due to soil erosion.
3. There is a deficiency of water. 3. Water is abundant.
4. The various stages are crustose lichen stage, foliose lichen stage, moss stage, herb stage, shrub stage, and forest stage. 4. The various stages are the plankton stage, floating stage, rooted stage, swamp stage, woodland stage, and forest stage.

Question 11.
Explain the difference between the serai stage and climax community during succession.
Answer:
Change during succession:

Characteristics Seral Climax
Community structure:
Size of individuals Ecological niches
Small
Few, generalized
large
Many specialized
Community organization: Simple Complex
Community functions:
Food chains and food Efficiency of energy use Nutrient conservation
Simple
low
low
Complex
High
High

Question 12.
(a) Write the pioneer species each of xerarch and Hydr-arch successions. Which type of climax community is attained by both these successions?
Answer:

  • Pioneer species of xerarch succession: Wind-borne lichen propagules settle on wet rock soon after rain or heavy dew. Pioneer lichens are crustose lichens. Examples: Graphis, Rhizocarpon.
  • Climax stages of xerarch succession: Trees growing in areas occupied by shrubs.
  • Pioneer species of Hydr-arch succession: Phytoplankton examples are diatoms, green flagellates, single-celled or filamentous green algae as well as blue-green algae.
  • Climax stages of hydra succession: Climax forest of trees

(b) Why is secondary succession faster than primary succession? Explain. (CBSE 2019 C)
Answer:
Secondary succession is faster than primary succession:

  • It has a secondarily based area built-in soil organic matter.
  • It is biologically fertile.
  • Underground parts, some seeds, and remnant species quickly give rise to a new community.

Secondary succession takes 50-100 years to complete in grassland and 100—200 years for the development of the forest. It takes short time as com¬pared to primary succession.

Question 13.
Outline the salient features of the ecosystem nitrogen cycling.
Answer:
Salient features of the ecosystem nitrogen cycle are listed below.

  1. The ultimate source of nitrogen is an atmosphere that cannot be directly metabolized by living organisms.
  2. Nitrogen-fixing bacterial activities facilitate the entry of nitrogen into biological pathways.
  3. Azotobacter and Clostridium are the major free nitrogen-fixing bacteria in the soil.
  4. Ammonification is done by many bacteria.
  5. Ammonia is converted into nitrate by a group of chemoautotrophic bacteria through a two-step process called nitrification.
  6. Denitrifying bacteria transform nitrate nitrogen to nitrous and nitric oxides ultimately to gaseous nitrogen.
  7. Most plants absorb nitrate from soil.

Question 14.
List the features of the phosphorus cycle.
Answer:
Features of the phosphorus cycle are listed below.

  1. The natural reservoir of phosphorus is a rock in the form of phosphates.
  2. Minute quantities of phosphates get dissolved in the soil solution during weathering of rocks.
  3. Phosphates enter the plants through their roots and then the food chain.
  4. The organic wastes and dead organisms are decomposed by phosphate-solubilizing bacteria, which release phosphorus back into the soil.
  5. The atmospheric input of phosphorus through rainfall or gaseous exchange of phosphorus between organisms and the environment is negligible.

Question 15.
“In a food-chain, a trophic level represents a functional level, not a species. Explain.” (CBSE Delhi 2016)
Answer:
In a food chain, a trophic level represents a functional level:

  1. Trophic level is a step or division of the food chain. It is characterized by the method of obtaining food.
  2. The number of trophic levels is equal to the number of steps in the food chain.
  3. The two fundamental trophic levels are producers and consumers.
  4. Producers are autotrophic organisms found in the ecosystem which synthesize food from raw materials. There are many such organisms at this level that comprise the first trophic level and not just one species, e.g. green algae plant, phytoplankton, etc.
  5. Consumers are heterotrophic organisms. Herbivores are primary consumers. In a pond ecosystem many crustaceans, larvae of insects constitute this trophic level.

Similarly, at the next trophic level, a number of small fishes, not just one species consist of the secondary consumer.

Question 16.
Explain the impact of human activities on the carbon cycle in nature and list its harmful effects. (CBSE Delhi 2019 C)
Answer:
Impact of human activities on the carbon cycle: Carbon is a component of all living organic compounds of protoplasm. It constitutes 49% of dry weight. C02 is present in the air. It is dissolved in water as carbonic acid and bicarbonates. It is also present in fossil fuels and graphite in rocks.

There is a regulation of the carbon cycle in nature. Rapid deforestation and the massive burning of fossil fuel for energy and transport have significantly increased the rate of releasing C02 into the atmosphere. Harmful effect. Greenhouse effect and global warming.

Question 17.
What are ecosystem services? Briefly explain. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Ecosystem Services. The products of ecosystem processes are named ecosystem services.
Examples:
The following services are provided by the forest ecosystem.
They are:

  • purify air,
  • mitigate droughts and floods,
  • help in the cycling of nutrients,
  • provide habitat to a number of the wildlife,
  • act as a storehouse of carbon,
  • influence the hydrological cycle and
  • maintain biodiversity.

The value of services of biodiversity is difficult to determine. Robert Constanza et al. have tried to put price tags on nature’s life-support services. Researchers have estimated them to be 33 trillion US dollars a year, while our global gross production is only 18 trillion US dollars.

Question 18.
What are the two main components of an ecosystem? Describe the physical factors which affect the distribution of organisms in different habitats.
Answer:
Abiotic (physical) and biotic components are the two main components of an ecosystem.
Abiotic components or physical factors:
1. Temperature: The physiological and behavioral adaptations of most animals depend upon the changes in the environmental temperature. The rates of photosynthesis and respiration in plants also fluctuate depending upon the change in temperature.

2. Water: The extent to which an organism is dependent on an abundant water supply depends on its requirements and its ability to conserve it in adverse conditions. Organisms living in dry habitats generally have good water conservation such as in cacti and camels.

3. Light: This is essential for all green plants and photosynthetic bacteria, and for all the animals dependent on the plants.

4. Humidity: This is important because it can affect the rate at which water evaporates from the surface of an organism, which in turn influences its ability to withstand drought.

5. Wind and air currents: This particularly applies to plants. Only plants with strong root systems and tough stems can live in exposed places where winds are fierce. The wind is also instrumental in the dispersal of spores and seeds.

6. pH: This influences the distribution of plants in soil and fresh-water ponds. Some plants thrive in acidic conditions others in neutral or alkaline conditions. Most are highly sensitive to changes in pH.

7. Soil nutrients: These particularly affect the distribution of plants in the soil.

8. Water currents: Particularly in rivers and streams. Only organisms capable of swimming or avoiding strong currents can survive.

9. Topography. Minor topographical differences may be just as important in influencing the distribution of organisms as wide geographical separation.

10. Background. The distribution of organisms whose shape or coloration is such that they are camouflaged when viewed against a particular background is related to the general texture and pattern of the environment.

Question 19.
Name the two fundamental trophic levels and describe the general makeup of each.
Answer:
The two fundamental trophic levels include the following:
1. Producers (Autotrophic organisms): Green plants are the producers in any ecosystem. They also include photosynthetic bacteria. The producers use radiant energy of the Sun during photosynthesis whereby carbon dioxide is assimilated and the light energy is covered into chemical energy.

This energy is locked up into the energy-rich carbon compounds i.e. carbohydrates. The oxygen that is evolved as a by-product in photosynthesis is used in respiration by all living organisms.

2. Consumers (Heterotrophic organisms): They are the living members of the ecosystem which consume the food synthesized by the producers. All living animals are thought to be consumers.

The consumers may be of the following types:
(a) Primary consumers (also called first-order consumers) which are purely herbivorous and depend upon green plants i.e. on producers for their food e.g., Cow, Goat, Rabbit, Deer, Grasshopper, and other insects.
(b) Secondary consumers (also called second-order consumers) are carnivorous animals and eat the flesh of herbivorous animals e.g., Tiger, Lion, Dog, Cat, Frog, etc.
(c) Tertiary consumers are the carnivorous animals that eat other carnivores e.g. Snake eats a frog, birds eat fishes
(d) Top consumers are carnivores of an ecosystem that are not killed and eaten by other animals e.g. Lions, vultures, etc.

Question 20.
Explain the meaning of biotic succession taking an example of succession in a hydrosere.
Answer:
Biotic Succession: The organisms interact among themselves. They not only influence their community but also change their physical or abiotic environment. The alteration in the physical environment is such as to continually favor another set of organisms till a stable community is formed.

Such a biologically controlled modification in the composition of a community of a particular area is called biotic succession or ecological succession. Biotic succession is also known as a successive development of different communities in a particular area till a climax community is formed.

The following seven stages of the hydrosere pattern of succession can be observed:

  1. Phytoplanktonic stage (Free-floating angiosperm)
  2. Rooted submerged stage
  3. Rooted floating stage
  4. Amphibian or Reed Swamp stage
  5. Sedge meadow stage
  6. Woodland stage
  7. Forest stage.

Question 21.
Give the graphic representation of the nitrogen cycle.
Answer:
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 14 Ecosystem 8
Nitrogen Cycle in Nature.

Question 22.
Distinguish between the following:
(i) Grazing food chain and detritus food chain (CBSE 2008)
Answer:
Differences between grazing food chain and detritus food chain:

grazing food chain detritus food chain
1. Primary source of energy is solar radiation. 1. It is detritus.
2. First trophic level is formed of all producers (plants). 2. Detritus Food Chain (DFC) begins with detritus or dead organic matter. Detrivores or decomposers feed over it.
3. long-sized food chains. 3. Small-sized food chains.
4. Examples: Predatory food chains on land and in water. 4. Examples: Fallen leaves of mangroves in the brackish zone of South Florida.

(ii) Production and decomposition
Answer:
Differences between production and decomposition:

Production Decomposition
1. It is the process of formation of organic food material by the process of photosynthesis. 1. It is the process by which complex organic compounds are broken into simpler inorganic substances.
2. It is done by green plants (producers). 2. It is done by bacteria and fungi (decomposers).

(iii) Upright and inverted pyramid
Answer:
Differences between Upright pyramid and Inverted pyramid:

Upright Pyramid Inverted Pyramid
In a terrestrial habitat, the pyramid of biomass is maximum at the level of producers and there is a progressive decrease in biomass from lower to higher trophic levels. In aquatic habitats, the pyramid of biomass is inverted or spindle-shaped whereas the biomass of a trophic level depends upon the reproductive potential and longevity of the members because the biomass of phytoplankton is less than that of zooplanktons.

(iv) Food chain and food web
Answer:
Differences between food chain and food web:

food chain food web
1. A single energy path where energy is transferred from producer to successive order of consumers. 1. It is the network of various food chains which are interconnected with each other like an interlocking pattern.
2. All food chain starts from plants that are the original source of food. 2. It has many linkages and intercrossing among the producers and consumers.

(v) Litter and detritus
Answer:
Difference between Litter and detritus:

Litter Detritus
1. It refers to discarded paper and plastics. 1. Dead plant remains like leaves, bark, flowers, and remains of dead animals including fecal matter is catted detritus.
2. It cannot be decomposed. 2. It can be decomposed.

(vi) Primary and secondary productivity.
Answer:
Differences between primary productivity and secondary productivity:

primary productivity secondary productivity
The amount of biomass or organic matter produced per unit area over a time period by plants during photosynthesis is catted primary productivity. The rate of formation of new organic matter by consumers is called secondary productivity.

Question 23.
Define ecological pyramid and describe pyramids of number and biomass.
Or
Construct a pyramid of biomass starting with phytoplankton. Label three trophic levels. Is the pyramid upright or inverted? Why? (CBSE 2009)
Answer:
Definition: An ecological pyramid is a graphical/mathematical representation of an ecological parameter, like a number or biomass or accumulated energy at different trophic levels in a food chain in an ecosystem.
1. Pyramid of number: The pyramid is the graphical/mathematical representation of a number of organisms present at each trophic level in a food chain of a particular ecosystem.

When the number of organisms at successive levels are calculated mathematically and plotted, they assume the shape of a pyramid. This is called a pyramid of numbers. The base represents the number of producers whereas the tip is represented by top consumers; inverted pyramids can also be formed.

In the given pyramid of the number, the number of producers (here grass and trees are the producers) will be far more than any other level. The number of consumers will be comparatively less than herbivores. You can guess if the number of carnivores increases and exceeds the herbivores then what the result will be?

The figure shows an inverted pyramid and there you can see producer is one tree and dependents like primary and secondary consumers are many. Parasite insects of birds will be definitely more than the number of birds.

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 14 Ecosystem 9

Pyramid of Numbers:
A. Straight—Forest and Water ecosystem
B. Inverted—Tree Ecosystem.
C. SpindLe shaped

2. Pyramid of Biomass: Biomass is defined as the total weight of dry matter present in an ecosystem at a given time. Graphical measurement of biomass is called the pyramid of biomass. Trophic levels at the base represent biomass as numbers in a pyramid of numbers. Here also you can obtain an upright and inverted pyramid.

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 14 Ecosystem 10

Pyramid of biomass Upright-Tree and forest ecosys¬tem. Inverted-Aquatic ecosystem.

The aquatic pyramid of biomass is always inverted because the biomass of fishes far exceeds the biomass of phytoplankton.

Question 24.
What is primary productivity? Give a brief description of factors that affect primary productivity. (CBSE Delhi 2011)
Answer:
The amount of biomass or organic matter produced per unit area over a time period by plants during photosynthesis is called primary productivity.

It is expressed in terms of gm-2yr-1 or kcal m-2yr-1. Primary productivity depends upon a number of environmental factors like:

  1. Availability of nutrients which varies in different types of ecosystem.
  2. Photosynthetic capacity of plants.
  3. The plant species inhabiting a particular area.
  4. Environmental factors.

Question 25.
Define decomposition and describe the processes and products of decomposition.
Answer:
Decomposition is defined as the process by which complex organic compounds are broken down into simpler inorganic substances that can be reutilized by plants for their growth.

Decomposition involves the following processes:

Decomposition process End products
1. Fragmentation of detritus by the detritivorous invertebrates. 1. Increases the surface area of detritus for the action of microbes.
2. lead, Ingor Eluviation. 2. Carrying away soluble nutrients from the A-horizon of soil by downward-moving gravitational water.
3. CatabolIsm involves the breakdown of detritus in the presence of extracellular enzymes released by the decomposers. 3. Simple organic compounds and Inorganic substances are formed.
4. Humlfication involves the transformation of simplified detritus into fully decomposed, dark-colored, and amorphous humus. 4. Humus acts as a reservoir of nutrients.
5. Minerailsatlon 5. Release of inorganic substances like CO2, water, etc., and minerals like K+, Mg++, Ca++, NH+4, etc. In the soil by the action of microbes.

Question 26.
Give an account of energy flow in an ecosystem.
Answer:
Different components for a universal model of energy flow are shown below:Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 14 Ecosystem 11
A generated energy flow model of ecosystem-Boxes represent biotic components and the arrows show the pathways of energy transfer

When a herbivore eats a plant, then it digests and oxidizes the ingested food to liberate energy which is equal to that used in synthesizing the organic biomass by the plant. Some of the released energy is lost as heat while only a part of the energy is used in building the biomass of the herbivore, which is called gross secondary productivity.

The same is repeated when the herbivore is eaten by a primary carnivore and so on. At each transfer, about 80-90% of potential energy is dissipated as heat while only 10-20% of energy is available to the next trophic level.

Thus, there is a decline in the amount of energy passing from one trophic level to the next trophic level. The study of energy transfer is called bioenergetics. Secondary productivity tends to be about 10 percent at the herbivore level, although efficiency may be higher, 20 percent at the carnivore level.

So regarding the energy flow, an ecosystem is characterized by the following:

  • Unidirectional flow of energy.
  • The decrease in useful energy.
  • Return of radiant energy of the Sun to the non-living system as heat.

Question 27.
Outline salient features of carbon cycling in an ecosystem. (CBSE Delhi 2012)
Answer:
The reservoirs of carbon are listed below:

  1. Carbon dioxide present in the air.
  2. Carbon dioxide dissolved in water.
  3. Carbonates in the earth’s crust.
  4. Fossil fuels like coal and petroleum,
  5. Bicarbonates in oceans.

The carbon cycle is the simplest of all nutrient cycles. Its salient features are listed below:
1. CO2 utilization: Carbon dioxide is used by green plants for the process of photosynthesis, and oxygen is released as a by-product. The fixed carbon enters the food chain and is passed to herbivores, carnivores, and decomposers. About 4 x 1013 kg of carbon is fixed in the biosphere through photosynthesis annually.

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 14 Ecosystem 12
Carbon cycle in nature.

2. C02 production and return to the atmosphere:
(a) Carbon dioxide is released into the atmosphere by the respiration of producers and consumers.
(b) It is also released by the decomposition of organic wastes and dead bodies by decomposers by the action of bacteria and fungi of decay.
(c) Burning of wood and fossil fuels also releases C02 into the atmosphere.
(d) Volcanic eruptions and hot springs also release C02 into the atmosphere.
(e) Weathering of carbonate-containing rocks by the action of acids also adds C02 to the atmosphere.

Question 28.
Name the pioneer species on a bare rock. How do they help in establishing the next type of vegetation? Mention the type of climax community that will ultimately get established. (CBSE 2009)
Answer:

  1. Lichens and mosses are the pioneer community. Lichens secrete acids which dissolve the rocks and helps in weathering rocks to form soil.
  2. Soil is formed by the action of lichens.
  3. Invasion is the successful establishment of species.
  4. The reaction is most important in succession. It is the mechanism of modification of the environment due to the influence of living organisms. Changes take place; annual grasses, perennial herbs, shrubs, and finally trees appear along with animal communities.
  5. Angiosperms trees forming forests will form climax communities.

Question 29.
(i) What is an ecological pyramid? Compare the pyramids of energy, biomass, and numbers.
Answer:
Ecological pyramid: An ecological pyramid is a graphical representation of an ecological parameter, like a number or biomass or accumulated energy at different trophic levels in a food chain in an ecosystem.

Ecological pyramids are of three types:

  1. Pyramid of number
  2. Pyramid of biomass
  3. Pyramid of energy
Pyramid of energy Pyramid of biomass Pyramid of number
(i) The relationship between producers and consumers in an ecosystem represented in the form of a pyramid in terms of the flow of energy is called the pyramid of energy. (i) The relationship between producers and consumers in an ecosystem represented in the form of a pyramid in terms of biomass is called the pyramid of biomass. (i) The relationship between producers and consumers in an ecosystem represented in the form of a pyramid in terms of number is called the pyramid of number.
(ii) It is always upright. (ii) It can be upright or inverted. (ii) It can be upright or inverted.

(ii) Write any two limitations of ecological pyramids. (CBSE 2017)
Answer:
Limitations of ecological pyramids:
(a) Ecological pyramid never takes into account the same species belonging to two or more trophic levels.
(b) It assumes a simple food chain, which never exists in nature.

Biotechnology: Principles and Processes Class 12 Important Extra Questions Biology Chapter 11

Here we are providing Class 12 Biology Important Extra Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Biotechnology: Principles and Processes. Important Questions for Class 12 Biology are the best resource for students which helps in Class 12 board exams.

Class 12 Biology Chapter 11 Important Extra Questions Biotechnology: Principles and Processes

Biotechnology: Principles and Processes Important Extra Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
What is genetic engineering?
Answer:
Genetic engineering. It is a technique for artificially and deliberately modifying DNA (genes) to suit human needs. It is also called recombinant DNA technology or DNA splicing. It is a kind of biotechnology.

Question 2.
Define recombinant DNA.
Answer:
Recombinant DNA. They are molecules of DNA that are formed through genetic recombination methods.

Question 3.
What is the role of restriction endonuclease?
Answer:
Restriction endonucleases are specific enzymes which can cleave double-stranded DNA at the specific site.

Question 4.
What are BACs and YACs? (CBSE 2016)
Answer:
BACs and YACs are artificial chromosomes from bacteria and yeast efficient for gene transfer. They are vectors.

Question 5.
Name the soil bacterium which contains the gene for production of endotoxins.
Answer:
Agrobacterium tumefaciens.

Question 6.
Name a technique by which DNA fragments can be separated. (CBSE Delhi 2008)
Answer:
Gel electrophoresis.

Question 7.
What is the principle of Gel electrophoresis?
Answer:
DNA fragments are negatively charged so they move to anode under electric field through the matrix (usually agarose). This matrix gel acts as sieve and DNA fragments resolve according to their size.

Question 8.
Name the compound used for staining DNA to be used in Recombinant Technology. What is the colour of such stained DNA?
Answer:
The compound used for staining DNA is ethidium bromide. Stained DNA becomes orange.

Question 9.
Name the technique for vector less direct gene transfer.
Answer:
Gene gun.

Question 10.
What is the role of ‘Ori’ in any plasmid?
Answer:
The plasmid is prokaryotic circular DNA which has a sequence of nucleotides from where the replication starts. This is called the origin of replication.

Role of Ori is to start replication. Also, the copy number of linked DNA is controlled by Ori.

Question 11.
Do normal £. coli cells have any gene resistance against antibiotics?
Answer:
No.

Question 12.
What is the function of TPA?
Answer:
TPA (Tissue plasminogen activator) dissolves blood clots after a heart attack and stroke.

Question 13.
Give an example in which recombinant DNA technology has provided a broad range of tool in the diagnosis of diseases.
Answer:
Construction of probes, which are short segments of single-stranded DNA attached to a radioactive or fluorescent marker.

Question 14.
Give the full form of PCR. Who developed it? (CBSE Delhi 2013)
Answer:
PCR is a polymerase chain reaction. It was developed by Kary Mullis in 1985.

Question 15.
What is the source of DNA polymerase, i.e. Taq polymerase? (CBSE Outside Delhi 2013)
Answer:
Taq polymerase is isolated from the bacterium Thermus Aquaticus.

Question 16.
Define “melting of target DNA”.
Answer:
The target DNA containing the sequence to be amplified is heat-denatured (around 94° C for 15 seconds) to separate its complementary strands. This process is called melting of target DNA.

Question 17.
Expand ELISA. Write one application. (CBSE Delhi 2013)
Answer:
ELISA-Enzyme Linked ImmunoSorbent Essay. Importance-lt is used for the diagnosis of AIDS.

Question 18.
What are transgenic animals? Give one example. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2016)
Answer:
Transgenic animals: The animals obtained by genetic engineering containing transgenes are known as transgenic animals.
Example. Transgenic cow ‘Rosie’.

Question 19.
How many PCR cycles are adequate for proper amplification of DNA segment?
Answer:
20-30 cycles.

Question 20.
Define gene therapy.
Answer:
Gene Therapy: It is the replacement of a faulty gene by normal healthy functional gene.

Question 21.
What is the importance of gene bank?
Answer:
It provides a stock from which genes can be obtained for improving the varieties or used in genetic engineering.

Question 22.
What can be the source of thermostable DNA?
Answer:
Thermostable DNA is obtained from a bacterium Thermus Aquaticus.

Question 23.
What are selectable markers?
Answer:
Genes which are able to select transformed cell from the non-recombinant cells are called selectable markers.

Question 24.
Why is enzyme cellulase used for isolating genetic material from plant cells and not from animal cells? (CBSE 2010)
Answer:
Cellulase is used for breaking the cell wall of plant cells whereas animal cells lack a cell wall. The cell wall is made of cellulose which can be broken down by cellulase.

Question 25.
Give one example each of transgenic plant and transgenic animal.
Answer:

  1. Transgenic tomato plant called Flavor Savr.
  2. A transgenic mouse called Supermouse.

Question 26.
What would be the molar concentration of human DNA in a human cell?
Answer:
Humans have 3 M of DNA per cell, i.e. the molar concentration is 3.

Question 27.
Do eukaryotic cells have restriction endonucleases?
Answer:
Yes, eukaryotic cells possess restriction endonucleases. They are involved in editing (Proofreading) and DNA repairs during DNA replication.

Question 28.
Name a technique by which DNA fragments can be separated. (CBSE Delhi 2008)
Answer:
Get electrophoresis.

Question 29.
Biotechnological techniques can help to diagnose the pathogen much before the symptoms of the disease appear in the patient. Suggest any two such techniques. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2019)
Answer:
PCR – Polymerase chain reaction
ELISA – Enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay

Question 30.
Why is it not possible for an alien DNA to become part of chromosome anywhere along its length and replicate? (CBSE 2014)
Answer:
For multiplication of any alien DNA, it needs to be a part of a chromosome which has a specific sequence known as the origin of replication.

Question 31.
Mention the type of host cells suitable for the gene guns to introduce an alien DNA. (CBSE Delhi 2014)
Answer:
Plant cells.

Question 32.
Name the enzymes that are used for isolation of DNA from bacterial and fungal cells for rDNA technology. (CBSE 2014)
Answer:
Lysozyme for bacterial cell and chitinase for the fungal cell.

Question 33.
What is EcoRI? How does EcoRI differ from an exonuclease? (CBSE Outside Delhi 2015)
Answer:
EcoRI is an endonuclease restriction enzyme which cut both the stands of palindromic DNA at a specific position of nitrogen base 5′ (GAATTC) 3′ while exonuclease removes nucleotides from terminals of DNA strands.

Biotechnology: Principles and Processes Important Extra Questions Short Answer Type

Question 1.
(i) While cloning vectors, which of the two will be preferred by biotechnologists, bacteriophages or plasmids. Justify with reason.
Answer:
Biotechnologists prefer bacteriophages for cloning over plasmids because they have very high copy numbers of their genome within the bacterial cells whereas some plasmids may have only one or two copies per cell and others may have 15-100 copies per cell. Phage vectors are more efficient than plasmids for cloning large DNA fragments.

(ii) Name the first transgenic cow developed and state the Improvement In the quality of the product produced by it. (CBSE Sample paper 2018-19)
Answer:
Transgenic cow Rosie produced human protein-enriched milk (2.4 grams per litre).

Question 2.
What are the two core techniques that enabled the birth of biotechnology?
Answer:
The two core techniques that enabled the birth of modern biotechnology are:

  1. Genetic engineering techniques to alter the chemistry of genetic material (DNA and RNA), to introduce these into host organisms and thus change the phenotype of the host organism.
  2. Maintenance of sterile (microbial contamination-free) ambience in chemical engineering processes to enable the growth of only the desired microbe/eukaryotic cell in large quantities for the manufacture of biotechnological products like antibiotics, vaccines, enzymes, etc.

Question 3.
Make a list of tools of recombinant DNA technology. (CBSE Delhi, 2011)
Answer:
Key tools of recombinant DNA technology:

  1. Restriction enzymes
  2. Polymerase enzymes
  3. Ligases
  4. Vectors
  5. Host organism.

Question 4.
What does EcoRI signify? How its name is derived?
Answer:
EcoRI signifies the name of restriction endonuclease:

  1. First capital letter of the name that comes from the genus Escherichia is ‘E’.
  2. Second two small letters come from the species Coli of prokaryotic cells from which they are isolated, i.e. ‘co’.
  3. Letter R is derived from the name of the strain, i.e. Escherichia coli Ry 13.
  4. The Roman number indicates the order in which enzymes were isolated from that strain of bacteria.

Question 5.
What are recognition sequences or recognition sites?
Answer:
The sites recognised by restriction endonucleases are called recognition sites. The recognition sequences are different and specific for the different restriction endonucleases. These sequences are palindromic in nature.

Question 6.
Define vector. Give the properties of a “Good Vector”.
Answer:
A vector is a DNA molecule that has the ability to replicate in an appropriate host cell, and into which the DNA fragment to be cloned is integrated for cloning.

A good vector must have the following properties:

  • It should have an origin of replication so that it is able to replicate autonomously.
  • It should be easy to isolate and purify.
  • It should get easily introduced into the host cells.

Question 7.
What is the difference between cloning and expression vectors?
Answer:
All vectors that are used for propagation of DNA inserts in a suitable host are called cloning vectors. When a vector is designed for the expression of, i.e. production of the protein specified by, the DNA insert, it is termed as an expression vector.

Question 8.
What do you understand by the term selectable marker?
Answer:
Selectable marker:

  1. A marker is a gene which helps in selecting those host cells which contain the vector (transformant) and eliminating the non-transformants. It selectively permits the growth of transformants.
  2. Common selectable markers for E. coli include the genes encoding resistance to antibiotics such as ampicillin. chloramphenicol tetracycline and kanamycin or the gene for (i-galactosidase which can be identified by a colour reaction. Normal E.Coli do not carry resistance against any of these antibodies.

Question 9.
Explain the principle that helps in separation of DNA fragments in Gel electrophoresis. (CBSE Delhi 2009 C)
Answer:
Get electrophoresis is a technique of molecules such as DNA/RNA/protein on the basis of their size under the influence of the electric field so that they migrate in the direction of electrode bearing the opposite charge. Positively charged molecules move towards cathode (-ve electrode) and vice versa. These molecules move through a medium or matrix and can be separated on the basis of their size.

Question 10.
Give the applications of PCR technology. (CBSE, Delhi 2013)
Answer:

  1. Amplification of DNA and RNA.
  2. Determination of orientation and location of restriction fragments relative to one another.
  3. Detection of genetic diseases such as sickle cell anaemia, phenylketonuria and muscular dystrophy.

Question 11.
Why is “Agrobacterium-mediated genetic transformation” in plants described as natural genetic engineer of plants? (CBSE Delhi 2011)
Answer:
Agrobacterium tumefaciens is a plant pathogenic bacterium which can transfer part of its plasmid DNA because it infects host plants. Agrobacterium produces crown gall in most of the dicotyledonous plants. These bacteria contain large tumours inducing plasmid (Ti-plasmids) which pass on their tumour causing gene into the genome of the host plant. Thus gene transfer is happening in nature without human involvement hence Agrobacterium-mediated genetic transformation is described as natural genetic engineering in plants.

Question 12.
Differentiate gene therapy and gene cloning.
Answer:
Differences between gene therapy and gene cloning:

Gene therapy Gene cloning
It is the replacement and/ or alteration of defective genes responsible for hereditary diseases by normal genes. It is the technique of obtaining identical copies of a particular segment of DNA or a gene.

Question 13.
From what you have learnt, can you tell whether enzymes are bigger or DNA is bigger in molecular size? How did you know?
Answer:
DNA molecules are bigger in size as compared to the molecular size of enzymes. Enzymes are proteins. Protein synthesis occurs from a small portion of DNA called genes.

Question 14.
How does restriction endonuclease work? (CBSE Delhi 2013, 2014, Outside Delhi 2019)
Or
What are molecular scissors? Explain their role. (CBSE 2009)
Answer:
Restriction endonuclease enzymes are called molecular scissors which can cut double-stranded DNA at specific sites.

Role of restriction endonuclease:

  • Restriction endonuclease inspects the length of DNA sequence.
  • It finds specific recognition sequence, i.e. palindromic nucleotide sequence in DNA.
  • These enzymes cut the strand of DNA a little away from the centre of palindromic sites.
  • Thus restriction endonucleases leave overhanging stretches called sticky ends on each strand.

Question 15.
How and why is the bacterium Thermus Aquaticus employed in recombinant DNA technology? Explain. (CBSE Delhi 2009)
Answer:
Thermus Aquaticus bacterium is employed in recombinant DNA technology because it has thermostable DNA polymerase (Taq. Polymerase) that remains active during high temperature-induced denaturation of a step of PCR.

This enzyme is employed during amplification of gene using PCR (Polymerase Chain Reaction). The amplified fragment can be used to ligate with a vector for further cloning.

Question 16.
Name the source of Taq polymerase. Explain its advantages. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2009)
Answer:
Taq Polymerase is extracted from Thermostable bacteria, namely Thermus Aquaticus. It remains active at a higher temperature and is used for denaturation of DNA during PCR.

Question 17.
What are recombinant proteins? How do bioreactors help in their production? (CBSE Outside Delhi 2009, 2015)
Answer:
Recombinant proteins. When any protein-encoding gene is expressed in a heterologous host, it is called recombinant protein. Bioreactors help in the production of recombinant proteins on large scale. A bioreactor provides optimal conditions for achieving the desired recombinant protein by biological methods.

Question 18.
What is meant by gene cloning?
Answer:
Formation of multiple copies of a particular gene is called gene cloning. A gene is separated and ligated to a vector-like plasmid. The recombinant plasmid is introduced into a plasmid-free bacterium through transformation. The transformed bacterium is made to multiply and form a colony. Each and every bacterium of the colony has a copy of the gene.

Question 19.
Both the wine marker and a molecular biologist who has developed a recombinant vaccine claim to be biotechnologist. Who in your opinion is correct?
Answer:
Both are considered biotechnologists. Wine marker utilises a strain of yeast which produces wine by fermentation. The molecular biologist uses a cloned gene for the antigen. The antigen is used as a vaccine. This permits the formation of antigen in huge quantity. Both generate products and services using living organisms useful to mankind.

Question 20.
You have created a recombinant DNA molecule by ligating a gene to a plasmid vector. By mistake, your friend adds an exonuclease enzyme to the tube containing the recombinant DNA. How will your experiment get affected as you plan to go to the transformation now?
Answer:
The experiment is not likely to be affected as the recombinant DNA molecule is circular and closed, with no free ends. Hence, it will not be a substrate for exonuclease enzyme which removes nucleotides from the free ends of DNA.

Question 21.
Explain the work carried out by Cohen and Boyer that contributed immensely to biotechnology. (CBSE2012)
Answer:
Work of Cohen and Boyer:

  1. Discovery of restriction endonuclease, an enzyme of E.coli which cut DNA at palindromic sequence.
  2. Preparation of recombinant DNA (Plasmid and DNA of interest.)
  3. Their work established recombinant DNA (rDNA) technology also called genetic engineering.

Question 22.
How are ‘Sticky ends’ formed on a DNA strand? Why are these so-called? (CBSE Delhi 2014)
Answer:
1. Restriction enzymes cut the strand of DNA a little away from the centre of palindrome site, but between the same two bases on opposite strands. As a result, single-stranded portions are left at each end. These overhanging stretches of DNA are called ‘Sticky ends’.

2. The Sticky ends are named so because they form hydrogen bonds with their complementary cut counterparts. The stickiness helps in the action of DNA ligase.

Question 23.
How is a continuous culture system maintained in bioreactors and why? (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
In order to maintain a continuous culture system, the used medium is drained out from one side of the bioreactor and the fresh medium is added from one side. This type of culturing method produces larger biomass leading to higher yields of the desired product.

Question 24.
Galactosidase enzyme is considered a better selectable marker. Justify the statement. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Recombinant strains can be differentiated from the non-recombinants ones easily by using this selectable marker. The selection is done on the basis of the colour change. All are grown on a chromogenic substance. Non-recombinants will change from colourless to blue while in recombinants insertional inactivation of galactosidase gene occurs.

Hence, recombinants showed no colour change. This is a single step, an easy method for selection.

Biotechnology: Principles and Processes Important Extra Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
What is genetic engineering? Explain briefly the distinct steps common to all genetic engineering technology.
Or
With the help of diagrams show the different steps in the formation of recombinant DNA by the action of restriction endonuclease. (CBSE 2011)
Answer:
Genetic engineering: It is a technique for artificially and deliberately modifying DNA (genes) to suit human needs. It is also called recombinant DNA technology or DNA splicing.

It is a kind of biotechnology:

  1. Isolation of genetic material which has the gene of interest.
  2. Cutting of gene of interest from genome and vector with the same restriction endonuclease enzyme. Amplifying gene of interest (PCR).
  3. Ligating gene of interest and vector using DNA ligase forming rDNA.
  4. Transformation of rDNA into the host cell.
  5. Multiplying host cell to create clones.

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 11 Biotechnology 1
Diagram showing various steps Involved in DNA recombinant technology for the production of a recombinant protein.

Question 2.
List three important features necessary for preparing a genetically modifying organism.
Answer:
Conditions necessary for preparing:

  1. Identification of DNA with desirable genes.
  2. Introduction of the identified DNA into the host.
  3. Maintenance of introduced DNA in the host and transfer of the DNA to its progeny.

Question 3.
How are restriction endonuclease enzymes named? Write examples. (CBSE 2014
Answer:
The naming of restriction enzymes is as follows:

  1. The first letter of the name comes from the genus and the next two letters from the name of the species of the prokaryotic cell from which they are isolated.
  2. The next letter comes from the strain of the prokaryote.
  3. The roman numbers following these four letters indicate the order in which the enzymes were isolated from that strain of the bacterium.

Examples:

  1. EcoR I is isolated from Escherichia coli RY 13.
  2. Hind II is from Haemophilus influenza.
  3. Bam H I is from Bacillus amylotiquefaciens.
  4. Sal I is from Streptomyces Albus
  5. Pst I is from Providencia stuartii.

Question 4.
Explain any three methods of vector less gene transfer. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2013)
Answer:
Vectors of gene transfer. Following are common methods of vectors gene transfer.

  1. Microinjection: Microinjection is the process/technique of introducing foreign genes into a host cell by injecting the DNA directly into the nucleus by using microneedle or micropipette.
  2. Electroporation: Electroporation is the process by which transient holes are produced in the plasma membrane of the (host) cell to facilitate entry of foreign DNA.
  3. Gene Gun: Gene gun is the technique of bombarding microprojectiles (gold or tungsten particles) coated with foreign DNA with great velocity into the target cell.

Question 5.
Write a note on the cloning vector.
Answer:
Cloning vectors:

  1. Plasmids and bacteriophages are the commonly used vectors
  2. Presently genetically engineered/ synthetic vectors are also used for easily linking the foreign DNA and selection of recombinants from non-recombinants.
  3. The following features are required to facilitate cloning in a vector:
    (a) Origin of replication (Ori)
    (b) Selectable marker
    (c) Cloning (Recognition) site
    (d) Small size of the vector.

Question 6.
What is PCR? List the three main steps. Show the steps with a diagrammatic sketch.
Answer:

  1. PCR. Polymerase Chain Reaction.
  2. Three steps of PCR.
    (a) Denaturation
    (b) Primer annealing and
    (c) Extension of primers.

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 11 Biotechnology 2
The three steps of PCR

Question 7.
Name the various cloning vectors and explain how a plasmid can be used for genetic engineering.
Answer:
Cloning vectors:

  • Plasmids
  • Bacteriophages
  • Plant and animal vectors
  • Jumping genes (Transposons)
  • Artificial chromosomes of bacteria, yeast and mammals (BAC, YAC).

Use of plasmid as genetic material Plasmids are obtained from bacteria. They are treated with a restriction endonuclease enzyme to obtain the fragments of the desired genome. They are allowed to fuse with the help of a DNA ligase enzyme. The recombinant plasmids thus formed are used as genetic material.

Question 8.
Give various means by which a competent host is formed for recombinant DNA technology. Why and how bacteria can be made ‘competent’? (CBSE Delhi 2013)
Answer:
A host cell should be competent enough to take the DNA molecule for the transformation as the following methods can be used.

  1. Using divalent cations: Bacteria are treated with Ca2+, etc. so that DNA enters the bacterium through pores in its cell wall.
  2. Heat shock: Cells can be incubated on ice and then at 42°C for a heat shock and then again put on ice.
  3. Microinjection: Recombinant DNA is directly injected into the nucleus of an animal cell.
  4. Biolistic. Cells bombarded with high- velocity micro-particles of gold or tungsten coated with DNA is known as a gene gun.

Question 9.
How is recombinant DNA transferred to host?
Answer:
Transfer of recombinant DNA into the host:

  1. The bacterial cells must be made competent to take up DNA; this is done by treating them with a specific concentration of calcium, that increases the efficiency with which DNA enters the cell through the pores in its cell wall.
  2. Recombinant DNA can then be forced into such cells by incubating the cells with recombinant DNA on ice followed by placing them at 42°C and then putting them back on ice (heat shock treatment),
  3. Microinjection is a method in which the recombinant DNA is directly injected into the nucleus of the animal cell with the help of microneedles or micropipettes.
  4. Gene gun or biolistics is a method suitable for plant cells, where cells are bombarded with high-velocity microparticles of gold or tungsten coated with DNA.
  5. Disarmed pathogens are used as vectors; when they are allowed to infect the cell, they transfer the recombinant DNA into the host.

Question 10.
Why DNA cannot pass through the cell membrane? How can the bacteria be made competent to take up a plasmid? Explain a method for the introduction of alien DNA into a plant host cell. Name a pathogen that is used as a disarmed vector. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2019)
Answer:
DNA is a hydrophilic molecule thus it cannot pass through the cell membrane.

Bacterial cells are made ‘competent’ by treating them with a specific concentration of divalent cation such as calcium in order to take up the plasmid. The divalent cation increases the efficiency with which DNA enters the bacterium through the pores of the cell wall.

Procedure: Recombinant DNA is forced into ‘competent’ bacterial host cells by incubating them on the ice. It is followed by placing them briefly at 42°C. It is termed ‘heat stock’ treatment. Again they are placed back on ice. This process allows bacteria to take up the recombinant DNA.

Gene gun or biolistic method is used for the introduction of alien DNA into a plant host cell. Here, the plant cells are bombarded with high-velocity micro-particles of gold or tungsten coated with DNA. Agrobacterium tumefaciens or Retroviruses can be used as a disarmed vector.

Question 11.
Write a note on vectors used during recombinant DNA technology. (CBSE Delhi 2008)
Answer:
A vector or vehicle DNA is used as a carrier for transferring selected DNA into cells. A plasmid with its small DNA from a bacterium is a good choice for indirect gene transfer because it can move from one cell to another and make several copies of itself. However, artificial chromosomes from bacteria and yeast called BACs and YACs respectively are more efficient for eukaryotic gene transfers.
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 11 Biotechnology 3

Plasmid and Yeast Artificial Chromosome

Question 12.
(i) Identify A and B illustrations in the following:
(a)Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 11 Biotechnology 4
(b)Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 11 Biotechnology 5
Answer:
A= 5′ GAATTC 3′
B marks for ORI (origin of replication).

(ii) Write the term given to A and C and why?
Answer:
A represents a nucleotide palindromic sequence. C-sticky end.

(iii) Expand PCR. Mention its importance in biotechnology. (CBSE Delhi 2011)
Answer:
PCR, Polymerase chain reaction. It helps in gene amplification.

Question 13.
Write the role of the following sites in pBR322 cloning vector:
(a) rop
Answer:
Role of rop, ori and selectable marker in pBR322 cloning vector.

Role of rop: Rop gene regulates copy number. Rop process is involved in stabilising the interaction between RNA I and RNA II which in turn prevents replication of pBR322.

(b) ori
Answer:
Origin of replication (Ori):

  • It is a specific sequence of DNA bases, which is responsible for initiating replication.
  • An alien DNA for replication should be linked to the origin of replication.
  • A prokaryotic DNA has normally a single origin of replication, while eukaryotic DNA may have more than one origin of replication.
  • The sequence is responsible for controlling the copy number of linked DNA.

(c) selectable marker (CBSE Delhi 2019 C)
Answer:
Selectable marker:

  • A marker is a gene which helps in selecting those host cells which contain the vector (transformant) and eliminating the non-transformants.
  • Common selectable markers for E. coli include the genes encoding resistance to antibiotics such as ampicillin. Chloramphenicol, tetracycline and kanamycin or the gene for B-galactosidase can be identified by a colour reaction.

Question 14.
(i) Explain the significance of palindromic nucleotide sequence in the formation of recombinant DNA.
Answer:
The palindromic sequences, i.e. the sequence of base pairs read the same on both the DNA strands when the orientation of reading is kept the same, e.g.
5’ — GAATTC — 3’
3’ — CTTAAG — 5’

Every endonuclease inspects the entire DNA sequence for palindromic recognition sequence.

(ii) Write the use of restriction endonuclease in the above process. (CBSE 2017)
Answer:
On finding the palindrome, the endonuclease binds to the DNA. It cuts the opposite strands of DNA, but between the same bases on both the strands and forms sticky ends. This sticky ends facilitate the action of enzyme DNA ligase and help in the formation of recombination DNA.

Question 15.
Describe the roles of heat, primers and the bacterium Thermus Aquaticus in the process of PCR. (CBSE 2017)
Answer:
Role of heat: Heat helps in the denaturation process in PCR. The double-stranded DNA is heated in this process at very high temperature (95°C) so that both the strands separate.

Role of primers: Primers are chemically synthesised small oligonucleotides of about 10-18 nucleotides. These are complementary to a region of template DNA and helps in the extension of the new chain. Rote of Bacterium Thermus

Aquaticus: A thermostable Taq DNA polymerase is isolated from this bacterium, which can tolerate high temperatures and forms new strand.

Question 16.
How has the use of Agrobacterium as vectors helped in controlling Meloidogyne incognita infestation in tobacco plants? Explain in the correct sequence. (CBSE 2018, Outside Delhi 2019)
Or
(a) Write the mechanism that enables Agrobacterium tumefaciens to develop tumours in their host dicot plant.
(b) State how Agrobacterium tumefaciens and some retroviruses have been modified as useful cloning vectors. (CBSE Delhi 2019 C)
Answer:
(a) Cloning
(b) A nematode Meloidogyne incognita infects the roots of tobacco plants and causes a great reduction in yield.

To prevent this infestation a novel strategy was adopted which was based on the process of RNA interference (RNAi).

Nematode-specific genes were introduced into the host plants using Agrobacterium vectors. The introduction of DNA was such that it produced both sense and anti-sense RNA in the host cells. These two RNAs, being complementary to each other, formed a double-stranded RNA (dsRNA) that initiated RNAi and thus, silenced specific mRNA of the nematode. Due to this the parasite could not survive in a transgenic host by expressing specific interfering RNA. The transgenic plant, therefore, got itself protected from the parasite.

Question 17.
Explain the roles of the following with the help of an example each in recombinant DNA technology:
(i) Restriction Enzymes
Answer:
Restriction enzymes :
(a) Restriction enzymes belong to nucleases class of enzymes which breaks nucleic acids by cleaving their phosphodiester bonds.
(b) Since restriction endonucleases cut DNA at a specific recognition site, they are used to cut the donor DNA to isolate the desired gene.
(c) The desired gene has sticky ends which can be easily ligated to cloning vector cut by same restriction enzymes having complementary sticky ends to form recombinant DNA.
(d) An example is EcoR1 which is obtained from E.coli bacteria “R” strain which cuts DNA at specific palindromic recognition site.
5‘ GAATTC 3‘
3‘ CTTAAG 5‘

(ii) Plasmids (CBSE 2018)
Answer:
Plasmids: Plasmids are autonomous, extrachromosomal circular double-stranded DNA of bacteria. They are used as cloning vectors in genetic engineering because they are small and self-replicating. Some plasmids have antibiotic resistance genes which can be used as marker genes to identify recombinant plasmids from non-recombinant ones.

To obtain the desired products, plasmids are cut and ligated with desired genes and transformed into a host cell for amplification. An example of artificially modified plasmids is pBR322 (constructed by Bolivar and Rodriguez) or pUC (constructed at University at California).

Question 18.
When the gene product is required in large amounts, the transformed bacteria with the plasmid inside the bacteria are cultured on a large scale in an industrial fermenter which then synthesises the desired protein. This product is extracted from the fermenter for commercial use.
(a) Why is the used medium drained out from one side while the fresh medium is added from the other? Explain.
Answer:
In the bioreactor used medium is drained out and the fresh medium is added to maintain the cells in their physiologically most active log / experimental phase,

(b) List any four optimum conditions for achieving the desired product in a bioreactor. (CBSE Sample Paper 2020)
Answer:
Condition for obtaining the desired product in a bioreactor:

  • Temperature
  • Substrates
  • SaLts
  • pH
  • Oxygen

Question 19.
List the steps in the formation of rDNA.
Answer:
Steps in formation of rDNA:
Recombined DNA technology involves the following steps:

  1. Isolation of DNA.
  2. Fragmentation of DNA by restriction endonucleases.
  3. Isolation of the desired DNA fragment.
  4. Amplification of the gene of interest.
  5. Ligation of the DNA fragment into a vector using DNA ligase.
  6. Transfer of DNA fragment into the vector using DNA ligase.

Question 20.
How is the isolated gene of interest amplified? (CBSE Delhi 2019, 2019 C)
Answer:
Amplification of the DNA/gene of interest:

  1. Amplification refers to the process of making multiple copies of the DNA segment in vitro.
  2. It employs the polymerase chain reaction (PCR).
  3. The process was designed by K. Mullis,
  4. This technique involves three main steps:
    (a) Denaturation
    (b) Primer annealing and
    (c) Extension of primers.
  5. The double-stranded DNA is denatured by subjecting it to high temperatures.
  6. Two sets of primers are used; primers are the chemically synthesised short segments of DNA (oligonucleotides), that are complementary to the segment of DNA (of interest).
  7. DNA polymerase enzyme (Taq polymerase) is used to make copies of DNA making use of genomic template DNA and primer.

Question 21.
List the features required to facilitate cloning into a vector. Show with a sketch the E. coli cloning vector showing restriction sites.
Or
Sketch pBR322. (CBSE 2012, Outside Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Features required to facilitate cloning vector.

  1. Origin of replication (Ori)
  2. Selectable marker
  3. Cloning sites
  4. Vectors for cloning genes in plants and animals
    Sites of cloning vector

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 11 Biotechnology 6

E. coli Cloning Vector pBr322 showing restriction sites (Hindlll, EcoRI, BamHI, Sal I, Pvu II, Pst I, ClaI), oriV and antibiotic resistance genes (ampR and tetR). Rop codes for the proteins involved in the replication of the plasmid.

Question 22.
With the help of simple sketch show the action of restriction enzyme (EcoR1).
Answer:
The action of restriction enzyme.
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 11 Biotechnology 7

Ecol cuts the DNA between bases G and A only when the sequence GAATTC is present in the DNA.

Question 23.
Explain the importance of (a) ori, (b) ampR and (c) rop in the E. colt vector. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2009, Outside Delhi 2019)
Answer:

  1. Importance of ori: This is a sequence from where replication starts and any piece of DNA, when linked to this sequence, can be made to replicate within the host cells, it allows multiple copies per cell.
  2. Importance of ampR: It is the antibiotic resistance gene for ampicillin. It helps in the selection of transformer cells.
  3. Importance of rop: It codes for the proteins involved in the replication of plasmid.

Question 24.
Name any two cloning vectors. Describe the features required to facilitate cloning into a vector. (CBSE Sample Paper)
Answer:
Plasmids and bacteriophages are two examples of the cloning vector. A vector is a DNA molecule that has the ability to replicate in an appropriate host cell and into which the DNA fragment to be cloned is integrated for cloning.

A good vector must have the following properties:

  • It should be able to replicate autonomously.
  • it should be easy to isolate and purify,
  • It should be easily introduced into the host cells.

Cloning vectors: All vectors that are used for propagation of DNA inserts in a suitable host are called cloning vectors. When a vector is designed for the expression of, i.e. production of the protein specified by, the DNA insert, it is termed as an expression vector.

Question 25.
What are bioreactors? Sketch the two types of bioreactors. What is the utility? Which is the common type of bioreactors? (CBSE Delhi 2013)
Or
How do bioreactors help in the production of recombinant proteins? (CBSE Outside Delhi 2009)
Or
(i) How has the development of bioreactor helped in biotechnology?
(ii) Name the most commonly used bioreactor and describe its working. (CBSE Delhi 2018, 2019 C)
Answer:
Small volume cultures cannot yield appreciable quantities of products. To produce these products in large quantities the development of ‘bioreactors’ was required where large volumes (100-1000 litres) of culture can be processed. Thus bioreactors can be thought of as vessels in which raw materials are biologically converted into specific products, using microbial, plant, animal or human cells or individual enzymes.

Role. A bioreactor provides the optimal conditions for achieving the desired product by providing optimum growth conditions (temperature, pH, substrate, salts, vitamins, oxygen).

One of the most commonly used bioreactors is of stirring type.

A stirred tank reactor is cylindrical or a container with a curved base which facilitate the mixing of the reactor contents. The stirrer facilitates even mixing and oxygen availability throughout the bioreactor. Alternatively, air can be passed through the reactor. It consists of agitator system, an oxygen delivery system, a foam control system, a temperature control system, pH control system and sampling ports so that small volumes of the culture can be withdrawn periodically.

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 11 Biotechnology 8

(a) Simple stirred-tank bioreactor (b) Sparged stirred-tank bioreactor through which sterile air bubbles are sparged

Question 26.
Describe briefly the following:
(i) Origin of replication (Ori).
Answer:
(a) It is a specific sequence of DNA bases, which is responsible for initiating replication.
(b) An alien DNA for replication should be linked to the origin of replication.
(c) A prokaryotic DNA has normally a single origin of replication, while eukaryotic DNA may have more than one origin of replication.
(d) The sequence is responsible for controlling the copy number of linked DNA.

(ii) Bioreactor.
Answer:
(a) They are vessels in which raw materials are biologically converted into specific products using microbial, plant or human cells.
(b) A bioreactor provides optimal conditions for achieving the desired product by providing optimum growth conditions, pH, substrate salts, vitamins, oxygen, etc.
(c) The commonly used bioreactors are of stirring type.
(d) A stirred-tank reactor is usually cylindrical or with a curved base to facilitate the mixing of the contents.
(e) The stirrer facilitates the even-mixing and oxygen availability throughout the bioreactor.
(f) The bioreactor has the following components:

  • An agitator system.
  • An oxygen delivery system.
  • A foam control system.
  • A temperature control system.
  • pH control system and
  • Sampling ports.

(iii) Downstream processing.
Answer:
(a) It refers to the series of processes, to which a genetically modified product has to be subjected before it is ready to be marketed.
(b) The processes include two processes:

  1. separation and
  2. purification.

(c) The product has to be formulated with suitable preservatives.
(d) Such formulation has to undergo thorough clinical trials in the case of drugs. Strict quality control testing is also required.
(e) A proper quality controlled testing of each product is also required.

Question 27.
Besides better aeration and mixing properties, what other advantages do stirred tank bioreactors to have over shake flasks?
Answer:
Shake flasks are the conventional flasks for fermentation studies during secondary screening or laboratory process development. So, stirred-tank bioreactors are used to produce the product in large quantities.

Besides aeration and mixing:

  1. it also helps in providing optimum growth conditions (temperature, pH, substrate, salts, vitamins, oxygen) to achieve the desired product.
  2. cost-effective
  3. due to baffles, the oxygen transfer rate is very high
  4. the capacity of fermenters is more.

Question 28.
Explain briefly the following
(i) PCR
(ii) Restriction enzymes and DNA
(iii) Chitinase. (CBSE 2012)
Or
Explain the three steps involved in a polymerase chain reaction. (CBSE Delhi 2018C)
Answer:
(i) PCR-Polymerase Chain Reaction; It is the process in which multiple copies of the gene or segment of DNA of interest are synthesised in vitro using primers and DNA polymerase.

Working Mechanism of PCR: A single PCR amplification cycle involves three basic steps: denaturation, annealing and extension (polymerisation).
(a) Denaturation. In the denaturation step, the target DNA is heated to a high temperature (usually 94°C), resulting in the separation of the two strands. Every single strand of the target DNA then acts as a template for DNA synthesis.

(b) Annealing (Anneal = Join). In this step, the two oligonucleotide primers anneal (hybridize) to each of the single-stranded template DNA since the sequence of the primers is complementary to the 3’ ends of the template DNA. This step is carried out at a lower temperature depending on the length and sequence of the primers.

(c) Primer Extension (Polymerisation): The final step is an extension, wherein Taq DNA polymerase (of a thermophilic bacterium Thermus aquatics) causes synthesis of the DNA region between the primers, using dNTPs (deoxynucleoside triphosphates) and Mg2+. It means the primers are extended towards each other so that the DNA segment lying between the two primers is copied.

The optimum temperature for this polymerisation step is 72°C. To begin the second cycle, the DNA is again heated to convert all the newly synthesised DNA into single strands, each of which can now serve as a template for synthesis of more new DNA. Thus the extension product of one cycle can serve as a template for subsequent cycles and each cycle essentially doubles the amount of DNA from the previous cycle. As a result, from a single template molecule, it is possible to generate 2n molecules after n number of cycles.

Applications of PCR:

  • Diagnosis of pathogen
  • Diagnosis of the specific mutation
  • DNA fingerprinting
  • Detection of plant pathogens
  • Cloning of DNA fragments from mummified remains of humans and extinct animals.

(ii) Restriction enzymes:
(a) They are called “molecular scissors” or chemical scalpels.
(b) Restriction enzymes, synthesised by micro-organisms as a defence mechanism, are specific endonucleases, which can cleave double-stranded DNA.
(c) Restriction enzymes belong to a class of enzymes called nucleases.
(d) They are of two kinds:

  • Exonucleases, which remove nucleotides from the ends of DNA.
  • Endonucleases, which cut the DNA at specific positions anywhere in its length (within).

(e) The recognition sequence is a palindrome, where the sequence of base pairs reads the same on both the DNA strands when the orientation of reading is kept the same, i.e. 5′ → 3′ direction or 3′ → 5′ direction.
e.g. 5′ – GAATTC – 3′
3′ – CTTAAG – 5′

(f) Each restriction endonuclease functions by inspecting the length of a DNA sequence and binds to the DNA at the recognition sequence.
(g) It cuts the two strands of the double helix at specific points in their sugar-phosphate backbones, a little away from the centre of the palindrome sites, but between the same two bases on both the strands.
(h) As a result, single-stranded portions called sticky ends are produced at the ends of the DNA; this stickiness of the end facilitates the action of enzyme DNA ligase.

  1. When cut by the same restriction endonuclease, the DNA fragments (of the donor as well as the host/ recipient) yield the same kind of ‘sticky ends’ which can be joined end-to-end by DNA ligases.
  2. Chitinase. This cell wall in fungi is made of chitin. The enzyme is used in fungi to break open the cell to release DNA along with their macromolecules like RNA proteins, lipids and polysaccharides.

Question 29.
Discuss with your teacher and find out how to distinguish between
(i) Plasmid DNA and chromosomal DNA
Answer:
Differences between plasmid DNA and chromosomal DNA:

Plasmid DNA Chromosomal DNA
1. It is self-replicating, DNA molecule found naturally in many bacteria and yeast. 1. Chromosomal DNA present in chromosomes of all organisms.
2. It is not essential for normal growth and division. 2. It Is essential for growth and division.
3. It contains information for a few traits. 3. It contains information for all traits.

(ii) Exonuclease and Endonuclease (CBSE, Delhi 2013)
Answer:
Differences between Exonuclease and Endonuclease:

Endonuclease Exonuclease
It cuts the DNA at a specific position of nitrogen bases anywhere within the length of DNA except the ends. This enzyme removes nucleotides from the terminals from 5’ or 3’ ends of DNA molecules.

Question 30.
Collect the examples of palindromic sequences by consulting your teacher. Better try to create a palindromic sequence by following base pair rules.
Answer:
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 11 Biotechnology 9

Question 31.
Can you list 10 recombinant proteins which are used In medical practice? Find where they are used as therapeutics (use the Internet).
Answer:

Recombinant Protein Therapeutic Use
1. Insulin For the treatment of diabetes Mellitus
2. Human Growth Hormone For the treatment of dwarfism
3. Interferons For the treatment of viral diseases, cancer and AIDS.
4. Streptokinase For treating thrombosis.
5. Tumour Necrosis factor For treating sepsis and cancer
6. Interleukins For treating various cancers.
7. Hepatitis-B Surface Antigen The vaccine against Hepatitis- B
8. Granulocyte Colony-stimulating factor For treating cancer and AIDS and in bone marrow transplantation
9. Granulocyte-macrophage Colony-stimulating factor For treating cancer and AIDS
10. Bovine growth hormone For increasing milk yield.

Question 32.
How is DNA isolated in a purified form? (CBSE Outside Delhi 2009)
Answer:
Isolation of DNA in the purified form:

  1. DNA has to be isolated in pure form for the action of restriction enzymes.
  2. DNA can be released from the cells by digesting the cell envelope by the use of enzymes like lysozyme for bacterial cells, chitinase for fungal cells and cellulase for plants cells.
  3. Since DNA is intertwined with histone proteins and RNAs, proteins are removed by treatment with proteases and RNAs by ribonucleases.
  4. Other impurities are removed by employing suitable treatments.
  5. The purified DNA is precipitated by the addition of chilled ethanol. It is seen as fine threads in suspension.

Question 33.
How is isolation and Fragmentation of DNA of interest carried out in recombinant DNA technology? (CBSE Outside Delhi 2009, 2019)
Answer:
1. Fragmentation DNA: Fragmentation of DNA is carried out by incubating the purified DNA molecules with suitable restriction enzymes at optimal conditions of temperature and pH.

2. Isolation of DNA (gene) of Interest:
(a) The fragments of DNA are separated by a technique called gel electrophoresis.
(b) The DNA is cut into fragments by restriction endonucleases.
(c) These fragments are separated by a technique called gel electrophoresis.
(d) Agarose, the natural polymer obtained from seaweeds, is used as the matrix.
(e) DNA fragments being negatively charged are separated by forcing them to move through the matrix towards the anode under an electric field.
(f) The DNA fragments separate/ resolve according to their size.
(g) The separated molecules are stained by ethidium bromide and visualised by exposure to UV radiation, as bright orange coloured bands.
(h) The separated bands of DNA (on the gel) are cut from the gel and extracted from the gel piece (elution).
(i) Such DNA fragments are purified and used for constructing recombinant DNA by joining them with cloning vectors.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 2 with Solutions

Students can access the CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science with Solutions and marking scheme Set 2 will help students in understanding the difficulty level of the exam.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 2 with Solutions

Time: 3 Hours
Maximum Marks: 80

General Instructions:

(i) The question paper comprises four sections A, B, C and D. There are 36 questions in the question paper. All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Section-A – question no. 1 to 20 – all questions and parts there of are of one mark each.
These questions contain multiple choice questions (MCQs), very short answer questions and assertion – reason type questions. Answers to these should be given in one word or one sentence.
(iii) Section-B – question no. 21 to 26 are short answer type questions, carrying 2 marks each. Answers to these questions should in the range of 30 to 50 words.
(iv) Section-C – question no. 27 to 33 are short answer type questions, carrying 3 marks each.
Answers to these questions should in the range of 50 to 80 words. :
(v) Section—D – question no. – 34 to 36 are long answer type questions carrying 5 marks each. Answer to these questions should be in the range of 80 to 120 words.
(vi) There is no overall choice. However, internal choices have been provided in some questions. A student has to attempt only one of the alternatives in such questions.
(vii) Wherever necessary, neat and properly labelled diagrams should be drawn.

Section-A

Question 1.
List any two observations when ferrous sulphate is heated in a dry test tube?
OR
Identify the products formed when 1 mL of dil. hydrochloric acid is added to 1g of sodium metal?
Answer:

  • Initial light green colour changes to reddish-brown colour
  • Colourless gas is evolved
  • Gas with choking smell is evolved (Any two)
    OR
  • Sodium chloride and hydrogen gas

Question 2.
Write the chemical name and chemical formula of the salt used to remove the permanent hardness of water.
Answer:
Sodium carbonate decahydrate, Na2CO3.10H2O

Question 3.
Which of the following is not observed in a homologous series? Give reason for your choice,
(a) Change in chemical properties
(b) Difference in -CH2 and 14u molecular mass
(c) Gradation in physical properties
(d) Same functional group
Answer:
(a) It does not occur due to the presence of the same functional group.

Question 4.
Why does the sun appear white at noon?
Answer:
The light is least scattered at noon.

Question 5.
Both a spherical mirror and a thin spherical lens have a focal length of (-)15 cm. What type of mirror and lens are these?
Answer:
Both are concave.
Alternative answer that should be given credit: Plano-concave lens.

Question 6.
The image formed by a concave mirror is observed to be real, inverted and larger than the object. Where is the object placed?
OR
Name the part of a lens through which a ray of light passes without suffering any deviation.
Answer:
Between the principal focus and the centre of curvature.
OR
Optical centre.

Question 7.
In the arrangement shown in figure there are two coils wound on a nonconducting cylindrical rod. Initially the key is not inserted in the circuit. Later the key is inserted and then removed shortly after.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 2 with Solutions 1
What are the two observations that can be noted from the galvanometer reading?
Answer:
There are momentary galvanometer deflections that die out shortly; the deflections are in opposite directions.

Question 8.
Draw the magnetic field lines around a straight current carrying conductor.
Answer:
The field consists of concentric circles centred on the wire
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 2 with Solutions 2

Question 9.
Two unequal resistances are connected in parallel. If you are not provided with any other parameters (eg. numerical values of I and R), what can be said about the voltage drop across the two resistors?
OR
Some work is done to move a charge Q from infinity to a point A in space. The potential of the point A is given as V. What is the work done to move this charge from infinity in terms of Q and V?
Answer:
Voltage-drop is same across both OR W = QV

Question 10.
Veins are thin walled and have valves. Justify.
Answer:
Veins have thin walls because the blood there is no longer under pressure and they have valves to ensure blood flow in one direction.

Question 11.
How is the wall of small intestine adapted for performing the function of absorption of food?
OR
Out of a goat and a tiger, which one will have a longer small intestine? Justify your answer.
Answer:
The inner lining of the small intestine has numerous finger-like projections called villi which increase the surface area for absorption.
OR
Goat because herbivores eating grass need a longer small intestine to allow the cellulose to be digested.

Question 12.
Explain how ozone being a deadly poison can still perform an essential function for our environment.
OR
Give reason why a food chain cannot have more than four trophic levels.
Answer:
Ozone layer protects us from harmful effects of UV radiation.
OR
The loss of energy at each step is so great that very little usable energy remains after four trophic levels.

Question 13.
State the role of pancreas in digestion of food.
Assertion (A) and Reason (R)
For question numbers 14,15 and 16, two statements are given- one labeled Assertion (A) and the other labeled Reason (R).

Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) as given below:
(i) Both A and R are true, and R is correct explanation of the assertion.
(ii) Both A and R are true, but R is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
(iii) A is true, but R is false.
(iv) A is false, but R is true.
Answer:
The pancreas secretes digestive juice which contains enzymes like trypsin for digesting proteins and lipase for breakdown of emulsified fats.

Question 14.
A. After white washing the walls, a shiny white finish on walls is obtained after two to three days. R. Calcium oxide reacts with carbon dioxide to form calcium hydrogen carbonate which gives a shiny white finish.
Answer:
(iii)

Question 15.
A. Food chain is responsible for the entry of harmful chemicals in our bodies. R. The length and complexity of food chains vary greatly.
OR
A. Greater number of individuals are present in lower trophic levels.
R. The flow of energy is unidirectional.
Answer:
(ii) OR (ii)

Question 16.
A. A geneticist crossed a pea plant having violet flowers with a pea plant with white flowers, he got all violet flowers in first generation. R. White colour gene is not passed on to next generation.
Answer:
(i)

Answer Q. No 17 – 20 contain five sub-parts each. You are expected to answer any four sub¬parts in these questions.

Question 17.
Read the following and answer any four questions from 17 (i) to 17 (v) (4 x 1 = 4)
All living cells require energy for various activities. This energy is available by the breakdown of simple carbohydrates either using oxygen or without using oxygen. 4 x 1 = 4
(i) Energy in the case of higher plants and animals is obtained by
(a) Breathing
(b) Tissue respiration
(c) Organ respiration
(d) Digestion of food
Answer:
(b) Tissue respiration

(ii) The graph below represents the blood lactic acid concentration of an athlete during a race of 400 m and shows a peak at point D. Respiration in athletics: The blood of an athlete was tested before, during and after a 400 m race:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 2 with Solutions 3

Lactic acid production has occurred in the athlete while running in the 400 m race. Which of the following processes explains this event?
(a) Aerobic respiration
(b) Anaerobic respiration
(c) Fermentation
(d) Breathing
Answer:
(b) Anaerobic respiration

(iii) Study the graph below that represents the amount of energy supplied with respect to the time while an athlete is running at full speed.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 2 with Solutions 4
Choose the correct combination of plots and justification provided in the following table.

Plot A Plot B Justification
(a) Aerobic Anaerobic Amount of energy is low and inconsistent in aerobic and high in anaerobic
(b) Aerobic Anaerobic Amount of energy is high and consistent in aerobic and low in anaerobic
(c) Anaerobic Aerobic Amount of energy is high and consistent in aerobic and low in anaerobic
(d) Anaerobic Aerobic Amount of energy is high and inconsistent in anaerobic and low in aerobic

Answer:
(b)

(iv) The characteristic processes observed in anaerobic respiration are
(1) presence of oxygen
(2) release of carbon dioxide
(3) release of energy
(4) release of lactic acid
(a) (1), (2) only
(b) (1), (2), (3) only
(c) (2), (3), (4) only
(d) (4) only
Answer:
(c) (2), (3), (4) only

(v) Study the table below and select the row that has the incorrect information.

Aerobic Anaerobic
(a) Location Cytoplasm Mitochondria
(b) End Product CO2 and H2O Ethanol and CO7
(c) Amount of ATP High Low
(d) Oxygen Needed Not needed

Answer:
(d)

Question 18.
Read the following and answer any four questions from 18 (i) to 18 (v). (4 x 1 = 4)
Answer:
Metallic Character
The ability of an atom to donate electrons and form positive ion (cation) is known as electropositivity or metallic character. Down the group, metallic character increases due to increase in atomic size and across the period, from left to right electropositivity decreases due to decrease in atomic size.

Non-Metallic Character
The ability of an atom to accept electrons to form a negative ion (anion) is called non-metallic character or electronegativity. The elements having high electronegativity have a higher S tendency to gain electrons and form anion. Down the group, electronegativity decreases due to increase in atomic size and across the period, from left to S right electronegativity increases due to decrease in atomic size.

(i) Which of the following correctly represents the decreasing order of metallic character of alkali metals plotted in the graph?
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 2 with Solutions 5
(a) Cs > Rb > Li > Na > K
(b) K > Rb > Li > Na > Cs
(c) Cs > Rb > K > Na > Li
(d) Cs > K > Rb > Na > Li
Answer:
(c) Cs > Rb > K > Na > Li

(ii) Hydrogen is placed along with alkali metals in the modem periodic table though it shows non-metallic character
(a) as hydrogen has one electron & readily loses electron to form negative ion
(b) as hydrogen can easily lose one electron like alkali metals to form positive ion
(c) as hydrogen can gain one electron easily like halogens to form negative ion
(d) as hydrogen shows the properties of non-metals
Answer:
(b) as hydrogen can easily lose one electron like alkali metals to form positive ion

(iii) Which of the following has highest electronegativity?
(a) F
(b) Cl
(c) Br
(d) I
Answer:
(a) F

(iv) Identify the reason for the gradual change in electronegativity in halogens down the group.
(a) Electronegativity increases down the group due to decrease in atomic size
(b) Electronegativity decreases down the group due to decrease in tendency to lose electrons
(c) Electronegativity decreases down the group due to increase in atomic radius/ tendency to gain electron decreases
(d) Electronegativity increases down the group due to increase in forces of attractions between nucleus & valence electrons
Answer:
(c) Electronegativity decreases down the group due to increase in atomic radius/ tendency to gain electron decreases

(v) Which of the following reason correctly justifies that “Fluorine (72pm) has smaller atomic radius than Lithium (152pm)”?
(a) F and Li are in the same group. Atomic size increases down the group
(b) F and Li are in the same period. Atomic size increases across the period due to increase in number of shells
(c) F and Li are in the same group. Atomic size decreases down the group
(d) F and Li are in the same period and across the period atomic size/radius decreases from left to right.
Answer:
(a) F and Li are in the same group. Atomic size increases down the group

Question 19.
Read the following and answer any four questions from 19 (1) to 19 (v). (4 x 1 = 4)
Sumati wanted to see the stars of the night sky. She knows that she needs a telescope to see those distant stars. She finds out that the telescopes, which are made of lenses, are called refracting telescopes and the ones which are made of mirrors are called reflecting telescopes.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 2 with Solutions 6
So she decided to make a refracting telescope. She bought two lenses, Lj and L2. out of which Lj was bigger and L2 was smaller. The larger lens gathers and bends the light, while the smaller lens magnifies the image. Big, thick lenses are more powerful. So to see far away, she needed a big powerful lens.

Unfortunately, she realized that a big lens is very heavy. Heavy lenses are hard to make and difficult to hold in the right place. Also since the light is passing through the lens, the surface of the lens has to be extremely smooth. Any flaws in the lens will change the image. It would be like looking through a dirty window.

(i) Based on the diagram shown, what kind of lenses would Sumati need to make the telescope?
(a) Concave lenses
(b) Convex lenses
(c) Bifocal lenses
(d) Flat lenses

(ii) If the powers of the lenses L1 and L2 are in the ratio of 4:1, what would be the ratio of the focal length of L1 and L2?
(a) 4:1
(b) 1:4
(c) 2:1
(d) 1:1

(iii) What is the formula for magnification obtained with a lens?
(a) Ratio of height of image to height of object
(b) Double the focal length.
(c) Inverse of the radius of curvature.
(d) Inverse of the object distance.

(iv) Sumati did some preliminary experiment with the lenses and found out that the magnification of the eyepiece (L2) is 3. If in her experiment with L2 she found an image at 24 cm from the lens, at what distance did she put the object?
(a) 72 cm
(b) 12 cm
(c) 8 cm
(d) 6 cm

(v) Sumati bought not-so-thick lenses for the telescope and polished them. What advantages, if any, would she have with her choice of lenses?
(a) She will not have any advantage as even thicker lenses would give clearer images.
(b) Thicker lenses would have made the telescope easier to handle.
(c) Not-so-thick lenses would not make the telescope very heavy and also allow considerable amount of light to pass.
(d) Not-so-thick lenses will give her more magnification.
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 2 with Solutions 7

Question 20.
Read the following and answer any four questions from 20 (i) to 20 (v). (4 x 1 = 4)
A solenoid is a long helical coil of wire through which a current is run in order to create a magnetic field. The magnetic field of the solenoid is the superposition of the fields due to the current through each coil.

It is nearly uniform inside the solenoid and close to zero outside and is similar to the field of a bar magnet having a north pole at one end and a south pole at the other depending upon the direction of current flow. The magnetic field produced in the solenoid is dependent on a few factors such as, the current in the coil, number of turns per unit length etc.

The following graph is obtained by a researcher while doing an experiment to see the variation of the magnetic field with respect to the current in the solenoid.

The unit of magnetic field as given in the graph attached is in milli-Tesla (mT) and the current is given in Ampere.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 2 with Solutions 8

(i) What type of energy conversion is observed in a linear solenoid?
(a) Mechanical to Magnetic
(b) Electrical to Magnetic
(c) Electrical to Mechanical
(d) Magnetic to Mechanical
Answer:
(c) Electrical to Mechanical

(ii) What will happen if a soft iron bar is placed inside the solenoid?
(a) The bar will be electrocuted resulting in short-circuit.
(b) The bar will be magnetised as long as there is current in the circuit.
(c) The bar will be magnetised permanently.
(d) The bar will not be affected by any means.
Answer:
(b) The bar will be magnetised as long as there is current in the circuit.

(iii) The magnetic field lines produced inside the solenoid are similar to that of…
(a) a bar magnet
(b) a straight current carrying conductor
(c) a circular current carrying loop
(d) electromagnet of any shape
Answer:
(a) a bar magnet

(iv) After analysing the graph a student writes the following statements.
I. The magnetic field produced by the solenoid is inversely proportional to the current.
II. The magnetic field produced by the solenoid is directly proportional to the current.
III. The magnetic field produced by the solenoid is directly proportional to square of the current.
IV. The magnetic field produced by the solenoid is independent of the current.
Choose from the following which of the following would be the correct statement(s).
(a) Only IV
(b) I and III and IV
(c) I and II
(d) Only II
Answer:
(d) Only II

(v) From the graph deduce which of the following statements is correct.
(a) For a current of 0.8 A the magnetic field is 13 mT
(b) For larger currents, the magnetic field increases non-linearly.
(c) For a current of 0.8A the magnetic field is 1.3 mT
(d) There is not enough information to find the magnetic field corresponding to 0.8A current.
Answer:
(a) For a current of 0.8 A the magnetic field is 13 mT

Section-B

Question 21.
Bile juice does not have any digestive enzyme but still plays a significant role in the process of digestion. Justify the statement.
OR
In birds and mammals the left and right side of the heart are separated. Give reasons.
Answer:
Bile juice makes the acidic food coming from the stomach alkaline for the action of pancreatic enzymes. Bile salts break the large globules of fat in the intestine to smaller globules increasing the efficiency of enzyme action. This is similar to the emulsifying action of soaps on dirt.
OR
The separation keeps oxygenated and deoxygenated blood from mixing allowing a highly efficient supply of oxygen to the body. This is useful in animals that have high energy needs (birds and mammals) which constantly use energy to maintain their body temperature.

Question 22.
State the events occurring during the process of photosynthesis. Is it essential that these steps take place one after the other immediately?
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 2 with Solutions 14
Absorption of light energy by chlorophyll.

  • Conversion of light energy to chemical energy and splitting of water molecules into hydrogen and oxygen.
  • Reduction of carbon dioxide to carbohydrates.

These steps need not take place one after the other immediately. For example, desert plants take up carbon dioxide at night and prepare an intermediate which is acted upon by the energy absorbed by the chlorophyll during the day

Question 23.
Give a test that can be used to confirm the presence of carbon in a compound. With a valency of 4, how is carbon able to attain noble gas configuration in its compounds?
OR
The number of carbon compounds is more than those formed by all other elements put together. Justify the statement by giving two reasons.
Answer:
A bum compound in air/ oxygen; Gas evolved turns lime water milky
By sharing its four valence electrons with other elements.
OR

  • Due to self linking ability of carbon/catenation
  • Since carbon has a valency of four it can form bonds with four other atoms of carbon or atoms of some other mono-valent element.
  • Due to small size of carbon it forms very strong and (or) stable bonds with other elements

Question 24.
The following observations were made by a student on treating four metals P, Q, R and S with the given salt solutions:

Sample MgS04(aq) Zn(NO3)2(aq) CaS04(aq) Na2S04(aq)
P No reaction Reaction occurs Reaction occurs No reaction
Q Reaction occurs Reaction occurs Reaction occurs Reaction occurs
R No Reaction Reaction occurs No Reaction No Reaction
S No Reaction No Reaction No Reaction No Reaction

Based on the above observations:
(i) Arrange the given samples in the increasing order of reactivity
(ii) Write the chemical formulae of products formed when Q reacts with CuS04 solution.
Answer:
(i) S > R > P > Q
(ii) Cu and QSO4

Question 25.
A student observes the given phenomenon in the lab as a white light passes through a prism. Among many other colours, he observed the position of the two colours red and violet. What is the phenomenon called? What is the reason for the violet light to bend more than the red light?
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 2 with Solutions 9
Answer:

  • The phenomenon is called dispersion.
  • Speed of violet light inside the prism is slowest and that of red is highest. Hence, the deviation of violet light is maximum and that of red is minimum.

Question 26.
A student has two resistors- 2 Q and 3 Q. She has to put one of them in place of R2 as shown in the circuit. The current that she needs in the entire circuit is exactly 9A. Show by calculation which of the two resistors she should choose.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 2 with Solutions 10
Answer:
The overall current needed = 9A. The voltage is 12V Hence by Ohm’s law V=IR,
R2 = 2Q
The resistance for the entire circuit = \(=\frac{12}{9}=\frac{4}{3} \Omega=\mathrm{R}\)
R1 and R2 are in parallel.
Hence, R = \(R=\frac{\left(R_{1} R_{2}\right)}{\left(R_{1}+R_{2}\right)}=\frac{4 R_{2}}{\left(4+R_{2}\right)}=\frac{4}{3}\)

Section-C

Question 27.
After self-pollination in pea plants with round, yellow seeds, following types of seeds were obtained by Mendel:

Seeds Number
Round, yellow 630
Round, green 216
Wrinkled, yellow 202
Wrinkled, green 64

Analyse the result and describe the mechanism of inheritance which explains these results.
OR
In humans, there is a 50% probability of the birth of a boy and 50 % probability that a girl will be born. Justify the statement on the basis of the mechanism of sex-determination in human beings.
Answer:
The ratio obtained is 9:3:3:1 in which parental as well as new combinations are observed. This indicates that progeny plants have not inherited a single whole gene set from each parent. Every germ cell takes one chromosome from the pair of maternal and paternal chromosomes. When two germ cells combine, segregation of one pair of characters is independent of other pair of characters.
OR
In human beings, the genes inherited from our parents decide whether we will be boys or girls. Women have a perfect pair of sex chromosomes (XX). But, men have a mismatched pair (XY).

All children will inherit an X chromosome from their mother regardless of whether they are boys or girls. Thus, the sex of the children will be determined by what they inherit from their father. A child who inherits an X chromosome from her father will be a girl, and one who inherits a Y chromosome from him will be a boy.

Question 28.
Plastic cups were used to serve tea in trains in early days- these could be returned to the vendors, cleaned and reused. Later,Kulhads were used instead of plastic cups. Now, paper cups are used for serving tea. What are the reasons for the shift from Plastic to Kulhads and then finally to paper cups?
Answer:

  • Use of Plastic cups raised the concern towards hygiene thus they were replaced by disposable plastic cups.
  • Plastic cups are non-biodegradable and harm the environment. They were thus replaced by Kulhads.
  • Making Kulhad made of clay on a large scale resulted in the loss of top fertile soil.
  • Now, disposable paper cups are used because – the paper can be recycled, it is biodegradable and is eco-friendly material which does not cause environmental pollution.

Question 29.
Explain where and how urine is produced?
Answer:
Blood passes through filtration units in the kidney called nephron

  • Passes through glomerulus in the Bowman’s capsule – Ultra filtration
  • Filtrate initially has glucose, amino acids, water, salts and nitrogenous waste
  • Reabsorption – Water (as per the need of the body), Glucose and amino acids are all reabsorbed
  • Secretion of excess water, salts and urea (nitrogenous waste) which makes up the urine.

Question 30.
(i) Which of the following reactions is/ are an endothermic reaction(s) where decomposition also happens?
• Respiration
• Heating of lead nitrate
• Decomposition of organic matter
• Electrolysis of acidified water
(ii) Silver chloride when kept in the open turns grey. Illustrate this with a balanced chemical equation.
Answer:
(i) Heating of lead nitrate; and electrolysis of acidified water

(ii) \(2 \mathrm{AgCl}(\mathrm{s}) \stackrel{\text { Sunlight }}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{Ag}(\mathrm{s})+\mathrm{Cl}_{2}(\mathrm{~g})\)
(No deduction for not mentioning state of reactants and products.)

Question 31.
The following table shows the position of five elements A, B, C, D and E in the modem periodic table.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 2 with Solutions 11
Answer:
(i) D, As it is on the left side of the table in group 2.
(ii) C, as it is in the group 18/ Noble gas.
(iii) E, as we move from left to right across a period, atomic radius decreases.

Question 32.
(i) Explain the formation of calcium chloride with the help of electron dot structure. (At numbers: Ca = 20; Cl = 17)
(ii) Why do ionic compounds not conduct electricity in solid state but conduct electricity in molten and aqueous state?
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 2 with Solutions 15
(ii) Ionic compounds do not conduct in solid state due to absence of free ions but they conduct electricity in molten and aqueous state due to presence of free ions.

Question 33.
Refractive index of water with respect to air is 1.33 and that of diamond is 2.42.
(i) In which medium does the light move faster, water or diamond?
(ii) What is the refractive index of diamond with respect to water?
Answer:
Refractive index = speed of light in vacuum / speed of light in medium.
Since the refractive index of diamond is more, hence the speed of light is lesser in diamond.
Let speed of light in water be vw and in diamond be vd.
Refractive index of diamond w.r.t water is say n = speed of light in water / speed of light in diamond
n = vwvd
Dividing both numerator and denominator by speed of light [c] we get
n = (vw/c) (vd/c)
= Inverse ratio of refractive index of water and diamond.
n = 2.42/1.33 = 1.82 (approx.)

Section-D

Question 34.
Match the following pH values 1,7, 10, 13 to the solutions given below:
• Milk of magnesia
• Gastric juices
• Brine
• Aqueous sodium hydroxide
Amit and Rita decided to bake a cake and added baking soda to the cake batter.

Explain with a balanced reaction, the role of the baking soda. Mention any other use of baking soda. 5
OR
(i) Four samples A, B, C and D change the colour of pH paper or solution to green, reddish- pink, blue and orange. Their pH was recorded as 7,2, 10.5 & 6 respectively. Which of the samples has the highest amount of hydrogen ion concentration? Arrange the four samples in the decreasing order of their pH.

(ii) Rahul found that the Plaster of Paris, which he stored in a container, has become very hard and lost its binding nature. What is the reason for this? Also, write a chemical equation to represent the reaction taking place.

(iii) Give any one use of Plaster of Paris other than for plastering or smoothening of walls.
Answer:

  • Milk of magnesia – 10
  • Gastric juices – 1
  • Brine – 7
  • Aqueous sodium hydroxide – 13

Baking soda undergoes thermal decomposition to form Na2CO3, CO2 and H2O; CO2 makes the cake fluffy & soft
\(\mathrm{NaHCO}_{3} \stackrel{\text { Heat }}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{Na}_{2} \mathrm{CO}_{3}+\mathrm{CO}_{2}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}\)

Uses:
Used in fire extinguishers/ antacid to neutralize excess acid in stomach / to neutralize the effect of acid in insect sting.
OR
(i) (a) B
(b) C,A,D,B
(ii) Due to moisture in the atmosphere it converted into gypsum
\(\mathrm{CaSO}_{4} \cdot 1 / 2 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}+1 / 2 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O} \rightarrow \mathrm{CaSO}_{4} \cdot 2 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}\)
(iii) Making toys/dolls or statues /fixing broken limbs/making decorative materials.

Question 35.
Trace the changes that take place in a flower from gamete formation to fruit formation.
Answer:
[Diagram drawn and annotated with the following points will also be considered]

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 2 with Solutions 16

  • Stamen is the male reproductive part and it produces pollen grains.
  • The ovary contains ovules and each ovule has an egg cell.
  • The pollen needs to be transferred from the stamen to the stigma.
  • If this transfer of pollen occurs in the same flower, it is referred to as self-pollination.

On the other hand, if the pollen is transferred from one flower to another, it is known as cross-pollination.
After the pollen lands on a suitable stigma, it has to reach the female germ-cells which are in the ovary. For this, a tube grows out of the pollen grain and travels through the style to reach the ovary/Figure

  • The male germ-cell produced by pollen grain fuses with the female gamete present in the ovule.
  • This fusion of the germ-cells or fertilisation gives the zygote.
  • After fertilisation, the zygote divides several times to form an embryo within the ovule.
  • The ovule develops a tough coat and is gradually converted into a seed. The ovary grows rapidly and ripens to form a fruit.
  • Meanwhile, the petals, sepals, stamens, style and stigma may shrivel and fall off.

Question 36.
In the given circuit, A, B, C and D are four lamps connected with a battery of 60V.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 2 with Solutions 12
Analyse the circuit to answer the following questions.
(i) What kind of combination are the lamps arranged in (series or parallel)?
(ii) Explain with reference to your above answer, what are the advantages (any two) of this combination of lamps?
(iii) Explain with proper calculations which lamp glows the brightest?
(iv) Find out the total resistance of the circuit.
OR
PQ is a current carrying conductor in the plane of the paper as shown in the figure below.
(i) Find the directions of the magnetic fields produced by it at points R and S?
(ii) Given r1> r2 where will the strength of the magnetic field be larger? Give reasons.
(iii) If the polarity of the battery connected to the wire is reversed, how would the direction of the magnetic field be changed?
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 2 with Solutions 13
(iv) Explain the rule that is used to find the direction of the magnetic field r2 for a straight current carrying conductor.
Answer:
(i) The lamps are in parallel.

(ii) Advantages:
If one lamp is faulty, it will not affect the working of the other lamps.
They will also be using the full potential of the battery as they are connected in parallel.

(iii) The lamp with the highest power will glow the brightest.
P= VI
In this case, all the bulbs have the same voltage. But lamp C has the highest current. Hence, for lamp C, P = 5 x 60 Watt = 300 W. (the maximum).

(iv) The total current in the circuit = (3 + 4 + 5 + 3) A = 15A
The Voltage = 60V
V = IR and hence R = V/I
R= 60/15 Ω = 4Ω

OR

(i) The magnetic field lines produced is into the plane of the paper at R and out of it at S.

(ii) Field at S > Field at P Magnetic field strength for a straight current carrying conductor is inversely proportional to the distance from the wire.

(iii) The current will be going from top to bottom in the wire shown and the magnetic field lines are now in the clockwise direction on the plane which is perpendicular to the wire carrying current.

(iv) Right hand thumb rule. The thumb is aligned to the direction of the current and the direction in which the fingers are wrapped around the wire will give the direction of the magnetic field.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 2 with Solutions

Students can access the CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard with Solutions and marking scheme Set 2 will help students in understanding the difficulty level of the exam.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 2 with Solutions

Time: 3 Hours
Maximum Marks: 80

General Instructions:

1. This question paper contains two parts, A and B.
2. Both Part A and Part B have internal choices.

Part-A:
1. It consists of two sections, I and II.
2. Section I has 16 questions of 1 mark each. Internal choice is provided in 5 questions.
3. Section II has 4 questions on case study. Each case study has 5 case-based sub-parts. An examinee is to attempt any 4 out of 5 sub-parts.

Part-B:
1. It consists of three sections III, IV and V.
2. In section III, Question Nos. 21 to 26 are Very Short Answer Type questions of 2 marks each.
3. In section IV, Question Nos. 27 to 33 are Short Answer Type questions of 3 marks each.
4. In section V, Question Nos. 34 to 36 are Long Answer Type questions of 5 marks each.
5. Internal choice is provided in 2 questions of 2 marks, 2 questions of 3 marks and 1 question of 5 marks.

Part – A
Section-I

Section 1 has 16 questions of 1 mark each. Internal choice is provided in 5 questions.

Question 1.
If xy = 180 and HCF(x, y) = 3, then find the LCM(x, y).
OR
The decimal representation of will terminate after how many decimal places?
Solution :
(LCM)(3)= 180
LCM = 60
OR
Four decimal places.

Question 2.
If the sum of the zeroes of the quadratic polynomial 3×2 – kx + 6 is 3, then find the value of k.
Solution :
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.15

Question 3.
For what value of k, the pair of linear equations 3x + y = 3 and 6.x + ky = 8 does not have a solution.
Solution :
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.16

Question 4.
If 3 chairs and 1 table costs ₹ 1500 and 6 chairs and 1 table costs ₹ 2400, form linear equations to represent this situation.
Solution :
Let the cost of 1 chair = ₹ x
And the cost of 1 table = ₹ y
3 x + y= 1500
6x + y = 2400

Question 5.
Which term of the AP 27, 24, 21, is zero?
OR
In an Arithmetic Progression, if d = -4, n = 7, an = 4, then find a.
Solution :
an = a + (n – 1) d
0= 27 + (n-1)(-3)
30= 3n
n= 10
10th term.
OR
an= a + (n — 1 )d
4 = a + 6 X (—4)
a = 28

Question 6.
For what values of k, the equation 9x2 + 6kx + 4 = 0 has equal roots?
Solution :
9x2 +6kx + 4 = 0
(6k)2-4 x 9 x 4 = 0
36k2 = 144
⇒ k= 4
k = ±2

Question 7.
Find the roots of the equation x2 + 1x + 10 = 0.
OR
For what value(s) of ‘a’ quadratic equation 3ax2 – 6x + 1 = 0 has no real roots?
Solution :
x2 + 7x+ 10= 0
x2 + 5x + 2x+ 10= 0
(x + 5)(x + 2) = 0
x = -5, x = -2
OR
3ax2 – 6x + 1 = 0
(-6)2– 4(3a)(1) < 0
12a > 36
⇒ a > 3

Question 8.
If PQ = 28 cm, then find the perimeter of ΔPLM.
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.1
Answer:
PQ = PT

PL + LQ= PM + MT
PL + LN = PM + MN
Perimeter (ΔPLM) = PL + LM + PM
= PL + LN + MN + PM = 2 (PL + LN) = 2(PL + LQ)
= 2 x 28 = 56 cm

Question 9.
If two tangents inclined at 60° are drawn to a circle of radius 3 cm, then find length of each tangent.
OR
PQ is a tangent to a circle with centre O at point P. If ∠OPQ is an isosceles triangle, then find ∠OQP.
Answer:
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.17

Question 10.
In the AABC, D and E are points on side AB and AC respectively such that DE || BC. If
AE = 2 cm, AD = 3 cm and BD = 4.5 cm, then find CE.
Answer:
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.18

Question 11.
In the figure, if B1, B2, B3,…. and A1, A2, A3,….. have been marked at equal distances. In what ratio C divides AB?
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.2
Answer:
8:5

Question 12.
sin A + cos B =1, A = 30° and B is an acute angle, then find the value of B.
Answer:
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.19

Question 13.
If x = 2 sin2 θ and y = 2 cos2 θ + 1, then find x + y
Answer:
x + y = 2sin2
0 + 2 cos2 9 + 1
= 2(sin2 0 + cos2 0) + 1
= 3

Question 14.
In a circle of diameter 42 cm,if an arc subtends an angle of 60° at the centre where n = then what will be the length of arc?
Answer:
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.20

Question 15.
12 solid spheres of the same radii are made by melting a solid metallic cylinder of base diameter 2 cm and height 16 cm. Find the diameter of the each sphere.
Answer:
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.21

Question 16.
Find the probability of getting a doublet in a throw of a pair of dice.
OR
Find the probability of getting a black queen when a card is drawn at random from a well- shuffled pack of 52 cards.
Answer:
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.22

Section-II

Case Study based questions are compulsory. Attempt any four sub-parts of each question. Each sub-part carries 1 mark.

Case Study Based-1 Sun Room

Question 17.
The diagrams show the plans for a sun room. It will be built onto the wall of a house. The four walls of the sun room are square clear glass panels. The roof is made using four clear glass panels, trapezium in shape, all the same size

  • one tinted glass panel, half a regular octagon in shape.

Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.3

Refer to Top View
(a) Find the mid-point of the segment joining the points J (6, 17) and I (9, 16).
(i) \(\left(\frac{33}{2}, \frac{15}{2}\right)p\)
(ii) \(\left(\frac{3}{2}, \frac{1}{2}\right)\)
(iii) \(\left(\frac{15}{2}, \frac{33}{2}\right)\)
(iv) \(\left(\frac{1}{2}, \frac{3}{2}\right)\)
Solution:
(iii) \(\left(\frac{15}{2}, \frac{33}{2}\right)\)

Refer to Front View
(b) The distance of the point P from the y-axis is
(i) 4
(ii) 15
(iii) 19
(iv) 25
Solution:
(i) 4

Refer to Front View
(c) The distance between the points A and S is
(i) 4
(ii) 8
(iii) 16
(iv) 20
Solution:
(iii) 16

Refer to Front View
(d) Find the coordinates of the point which divides the line segment joining the points A and B in the ratio 1 : 3 internally.
(i) (8.5, 2.0)
(ii) (2.0, 9.5)
(iii) (3.0, 7.5)
(iv) (2.0, 8.5)
Solution:
(iv) (2.0, 8.5)

Refer to Front View
(e) If a point (x,v) is equidistant from the Q(9. 8) and S( 17, 8), then 1
(i) x + y = 13
(ii) x – 13 = 0
(iii) x – 13 = 0
(iv) x – y – 13
Solution:
(ii) x – 13 = 0

Case Study Based-2

Question 18.
Scale Factor and Similarity
Scale Factor
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.4
Solution :
A scale drawing of an object is the same shape as the object but a different size.
The scale of a drawing is a comparison of the length used on a drawing to the length it represents. The scale is written as a ratio.

Similar Figures

The ratio of two corresponding sides in similar figures is called the scale factor.
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.5
If one shape can become another using resizing, then the shapes are similar.
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.6
Hence, two shapes are similar when one can become the other after a resize, flip, slide or turn.
(a) A model of a boat is made on the scale of 1 : 4. The model is 120 cm long. The full size of the boat has a width of 60 cm. What is the width of the scale model?
(i) 20 cm
(ii) 25 cm
(iii) 15 cm
(iv) 240 cm
Solution :
(iii) 15 cm

(b) What will effect the similarity of any two polygons?
(i) They are flipped horizontally.
(ii) They are dilated by a scale factor.
(iii) They are translated down.
(iv) They are not the mirror image of one another.
Solution :
(iv) They are not the mirror image of one another.

(c) If two similar triangles have a scale factor of a : b, which statement regarding the two triangles is true?
(i) The ratio of their perimeters is 3a : b
(ii) Their altitudes have a ratio a : b
(iii) Their medians have a ratio \(\frac{a}{2}: b\)
(iv) Their angle bisectors have a ratio a2: b2
Solution :
(ii) Their altitudes have a ratio a : b

(d) The shadow of a stick 5 m long is 2 m. At the same time, the shadow of a tree 12.5 m high is
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.7
(i) 3 m
(ii) 3.5 m
(iii) 4.5 m
(iv) 5 m
Solution :
(iv) 5 m

(e) Below you see a student’s mathematical model of a farmhouse roof with measurements. The attic floor, ABCD in the model, is a square. The beams that support the roof are the edges of a rectangular prism, EFGHKLMN. E is the middle of AT, F is the middle of BT, G is the middle of CT. and H is the middle of DT. All the edges of the pyramid in the model have length of 12 m.
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.8

What is the length of EF, where EF is one of the horizontal edges of the block?
(i) 24 m
(ii) 3 m
(iii) 6 m
(iv) 10 m
Solution :
(iii) 6 m

Case Study Based-3

Question 19.
Applications of Parabolas-Highway Overpasses/Underpasses A highway underpass is parabolic in shape.
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.9
Answer:
Parabola: A parabola is the graph that results from p(x) — ax2 + bx + c. Parabolas are symmetric about a vertical line known as the Axis of Symmetry. The Axis of Symmetry runs through the maximum or minimum point of the parabola which is called the vertex.
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.10

(a) If the highway overpass is represented by x2 – 2x – 8, then its zeroes are
(i) (2. -4)
(ii) (4, -2)
(iii) (-2, -2)
(iv) (-4, -4)
Answer:
(ii) (4, -2)

(b) The highway overpass is represented graphically. Zeroes of a polynomial can be expressed graphically. Number of zeroes of polynomial is equal to number of points where the graph of polynomial
(i) intersects x-axis
(ii) intersects y-axis
(iii) intersects y-axis or x-axis
(iv) None of the above
Answer:
(i) intersects x-axis

(c) Graph of a quadratic polynomial is a
(i) straight line.
(ii) Circle
(iii) Parabolla
(iv) ellipse
Answer:
(iii) Parabolla

(d) The representation of Highway Underpass whose one zero is 6 and sum of the zeroes is 0, is 1
(i)  x2 – 6x + 2
(ii) x2 – 36
(iii) x2 – 6
(iv) x2 – 3
Answer:
(ii) x2 – 36

(e) The number of zeroes that polynomial f(x) = (x – 2)2 + 4 can have is:
(i) 1
(ii) 2
(iii) 0
(iv) 3
Answer:
(iii) 0

Case Study Based-4

Question 20.
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.11

(a) Estimate the mean time taken by a student to finish the race.
(i) 54
(ii) 63
(iii) 43
(iv) 50
Solution :
(iii) 43

(b) What will be the upper limit of the modal class?
(i) 20
(ii) 40
(iii) 60
(iv) 80
Solution :
(iii) 60

(c) The construction of cumulative frequency table is useful in detennining the
(i) mean
(ii) median
(iii) mode
(iv) All of the above
Solution :
(ii) median

(d) The sum of lower limits of median class and modal class is
Solution :
(i) 60
(ii) 100
(iii) 80
(iv) 140
Solution :
(iii) 80

(e) How many students finished the race within 1 minute?
(i) 18
(ii) 37
(iii) 31
(iv) 8
Solution :
(iii) 31

Part-B
Section-III

All questions are compulsory. In case of internal choices, attempt anyone.

Question 21.
3 bells ring at an interval of 4, 7 and 14 minutes. All three bell rang at 6 am, when the three balls will the ring together next?
Solution :
4 = 2 x 2
7 =7 x 1
14 = 2 x 7
LCM = 2 x 2 x 7 = 28
The three bells will ring together again at 6 : 28 am

Question 22.
Find the point on x-axis which is equidistant from the points (2, -2) and (-4, 2).
OR
P(-2, 5) and Q(3, 2) are two points. Find the coordinates of the point R on PQ such that PR = 2QR
Solution:
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.23

Question 23.
Find a quadratic polynomial whose zeroes are \(5-3 \sqrt{2} \text { and } 5+3 \sqrt{2}\)
Solution:
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.24

Question 24.
Draw a line segment AB of length 9 cm. With A and B as centres, draw circles of radius 5 cm and 3 cm respectively. Construct tangents to each circle from the centre of the other circle.
Solution:
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.25

Question 25.
If \(tan \mathrm{A}=\frac{3}{4}\), find the value of \(\frac{1}{\sin A}+\frac{1}{\cos A}\) and 3 cm respectively. Construct tangents to each circle from the centre of the other circle. If \(\sqrt{3} \sin \theta-\cos \theta=0 \text { and } 0^{\circ}<\theta<90^{\circ} \) find the value of θ.
Solution:
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.26
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.37

Question 26.
In the figure, quadrilateral ABCD is circumscribing a circle with centre O and AD ⊥ AB. If radius of incircle is 10 cm, then find the value of x.
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.12
Solution:
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.36

Question 27.
Prove that 2 – √3 is irrational, given that √3 is irrational.
Solution:
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.28

Question 28.
If one root of the quadratic equation 3x2 + px + 4 = 0 is \(\frac{2}{3}\), then find the value of p and the other root of the equation.
OR
The roots α and β of the quadratic equation x2 – 5x + 3(k – 1) = 0 are such that α – β = 1. Find the value k.
Solution :
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.29
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.30

Question 29.
In the figure, ABCD is a square of side 14 cm. Semicircles are drawn with each side of square as diameter. Find the area of the shaded region.
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.13
Solution:
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.31

Question 30.
The perimeters of two similar triangles are 25 cm and 15 cm respectively. If one side of the first triangle is 9 cm, find the length of the corresponding side of the second triangle.
OR
In an equilateral triangle ABC, D is a point on side BC such that BD = -BC. Prove that 9 AD2 = 7 AB2.
Solution:
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.32
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.33
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.34

Question 31.
The median of the following data is 16. Find the missing frequencies a and b, if the total of the frequencies is 70.

Class 0-5 5-10 10-15 15-20 20-25 25-30 30-35 35-40
Frequency 12 Cl 12 15 b 6 6 4

Solution:

Class Frequency Cumulative Frequency
0-5 12 12
5-10 a 12 + a
10-15 12 24 +a
15-20 15 39 + a
20-25 b 39 + a + b
25-30 6 45 + a + b
30-35 6 51+0 + 6
35-40 4 55 + o + 6
Total N = 70

Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.35

Question 32.
If the angles of elevation of the top of the candle from two coins distant ‘a’ cm and ‘b’ cm (a > b) from its base and in the same straight line from it are 30° and 60°, then find the height of the candle.
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.14
Solution:
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.38

Let AB = candle
C and D are two coins

Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.39
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.40
Question 33.
The mode of the following data is 67. Find the missing frequency x:
Solution:
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.41

Question 34.
The two palm trees are of equal heights and are standing opposite to each other on either side of the river, which is 80 m wide. From a point O between them on the river, the angles of elevation of the top of the trees are 60° and 30° respectively. Find the height of the trees and the distances of the point O from the trees.
OR
The angles of depression of the top and bottom of a building 50 metres high as observed from the top of a tower are 30° and 60° respectively. Find the height of the tower, and also the horizontal distance between the building and the tower.
Solution:
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.42
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.43
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.44
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.45

Hence, height of the tower = h = 75 m
Distance between the building and the tower = 25 √3 = 43.25 m

Question 35.
Water is flowing through a cylindrical pipe of internal diameter 2 cm, into a cylindrical tank of base radius 40 cm at the rate of 0.7 m/sec. By how much will the water rise in the tank in half an hour?
Solution:
For pipe, r = 1cm
Length of water flowing in 1 sec, h = 0.1 m = 70 cm
Cylindrical Tank, R = 40 cm, rise in water level = H
Volume of water flowing in 1 sec = n×h = a × 1 x 1 × 70 = 70a
Volume of water flowing in 60 sec = 70a: x 60
Volume of water flowing in 30 minutes = 70a × 60 ×30
Volume of water in Tank = ar2H = a × 40 × 40 × H
Volume of water in Tank = Volume of water flowing in 30 minutes
a × 40 × 40 × H = 70a x 60 x 30

Question 36.
A motorboat covers a distance of 16 km upstream and 24 km downstream in 6 hours. In the same time, it covers a distance of 12 km upstream and 36 km downstream. Find the speed of the boat in still water and that of the stream.
Solution:
Let speed of the boat in still water = x km/hr,
and Speed of the stream = y km/hr
Downstream speed = (x + y) km/hr
Upstream speed = (x – y) km/hr 24
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.46
Maths Sample Paper Class 10 2020 Standard Solution Set 2.47

Thus, speed of the boat in still water = 8 km/hr,
Speed of the stream = 4 km/hr

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions

Students can access the CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard with Solutions and marking scheme Set 3 will help students in understanding the difficulty level of the exam.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions

Time: 3 Hours
Maximum Marks: 80

General Instructions:

1. This question paper contains two parts, A and B.
2. Both Part A and Part B have internal choices.

Part-A:
1. It consists of two sections, I and II.
2. Section I has 16 questions of 1 mark each. Internal choice is provided in 5 questions.
3. Section II has 4 questions on case study. Each case study has 5 case-based sub-parts. An examinee is to attempt any 4 out of 5 sub-parts.

Part-B:
1. It consists of three sections III, IV and V.
2. In section III, Question Nos. 21 to 26 are Very Short Answer Type questions of 2 marks each.
3. In section IV, Question Nos. 27 to 33 are Short Answer Type questions of 3 marks each.
4. In section V, Question Nos. 34 to 36 are Long Answer Type questions of 5 marks each.
5. Internal choice is provided in 2 questions of 2 marks, 2 questions of 3 marks and 1 question of 5 marks.

Part – A
Section-I

Section I has 16 questions of 1 mark each. Internal choice is provided in 5 questions.

Question 1.
If one of the zeroes of the quadratic polynomial x1 + 3x + k is 2, then find the value of k
Solution :
Since 2 is a zero of p(x) = x2 + 3x + k, then p(x) =0
⇒(2)2 + 3 x 2 + k = 0
⇒ 4 + 6 + k = 0
⇒ k = -10

Question 2.
Find the total number of factors of a prime number.
OR
Find the HCF and the LCM of 12, 21, 15.
Solution :
We know that prime number is a number which has exactly two factors, i.e., 1 and the number itself. So, the total number of factors of a prime number is 2.
OR
12 = 2 x 2 x 3 = 22 x 31
15 = 3 x 5 = 31 x 51 21 = 3 x 7 = 31 x 71 HCF(12, 15,21)= 3
LCM(12, 15, 21) = 22 x 31 x 51 x 71 = 4 x 3 x 5 x 7 = 420

Question 3.
Find the value of k for which the system of equations x + y – 4 = 0 and 2x + ky = 3, has no solution.
Solution :
For the equations, x + y -4 = 0 and 2x + ky = 3
⇒ 2x + ky  –  3 = 0
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 1

Question 4.
Find the value of x for which 2x, (x + 10) and (3x + 2) are the three consecutive terms of an AP.
OR
The first term of an AP is p and the common difference is q. Find its 10th term.
Solution :
2x (x + 10) and (3x + 2) are three consecutive terms of an AP.
Then, (x+10)-2x= (3x + 2)-(x+10)
⇒ x + 10 – 2x = 3x + 2 – x – 10
⇒ -x + 10 = 2x- 8
⇒ 3x = 18
⇒ x = 6
an = a + (n – 1 )d  ⇒ am =p + (10 – 1 )q =p + 9q
a10 = p + 9q

Question 5.
In figure, ΔABC is circumscribing a circle. Find the length of BC.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 2
Solution :
Line segments AB, BC and AC are tangents of the circle.
AP = AR = 4 cm     …(i)
[Tangents drawn from the same point to a circle are equal]
Similarly, BP = BQ = 3 cm ……………… (ii)
and   CQ = CR     ………….. (iii)
Since, AC =11 cm  ⇒ AR + CR = 11 cm
⇒ 4 cm + CR = 11 cm [from (i)]
⇒ CR = 7 cm ……………… (iv)
BC = BQ + CQ = 3 cm + 7 cm  [From (ii),(iii) and (iv)]
= 10 cm

Question 6.
If in the given figure, DE || BC, then find EC.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 3
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 4

Question 7.
Find the value of  \(\left(\sin ^{2} \theta+\frac{1}{1+\tan ^{2} \theta}\right)\)
Solution :
\(\sin ^{2} \theta+\frac{1}{1+\tan ^{2} \theta}=\sin ^{2} \theta+\frac{1}{\sec ^{2} \theta}=\sin ^{2} \theta+\cos ^{2} \theta=1\)

Question 8.
Find the value of (1 + tan2 θ) (1 – sin θ) (1 + sin θ).
Solution :
(1 + tan2 θ)(1 – sin θ)(1 + sin θ) = (1 + tan2 θ)(1 – sin2 θ)
\(=\sec ^{2} \theta \cos ^{2} \theta=\frac{1}{\cos ^{2} \theta} \times \cos ^{2} \theta=1\)

Question 9.
Two cones have their heights in the ratio 1 : 3 and radii in the ratio 3:1. What is the ratio of their volumes? 1
Solution :
Let h1 and h2 be the heights of two cones and r1 and r2 by the radii
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 5

Question 10.
If ABC is an equilateral triangle of side 2a, then find the length of one of its altitudes.
OR
In the given figure, MN || QR. If PM = x cm, MQ = 10 cm, PN = (x – 2) cm, NR = 6 cm, then find the
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 6
Solution :
In ∠ADB and ∠ADC,
AB = AC [Sides of equilateral triangle ABC]
AD = AD [Common]
∠ADB = ∠ADC [90°, AD ⊥ BC]
ΔADB ≅ ΔADC
ABC is an equilateral triangle such that each side is 2a and AD ⊥ BC.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 7
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 8

Question 11.
Base of an isosceles triangle is \(\frac{2}{3}\) times its congruent sides. Perimeter of the triangle is 32 cm.
Formulate this problem as a pair of equations.
Solution :
Let the congruent side of isosceles triangle be x cm and its base be y cm.
Then \(y=\frac{2}{3} x\)
2x – 3y = 0 ……………. (i)
Also,   x + x + y=32  ⇒ 2x + y = 32 ………….. (ii)

Question 12.
Check whether x(x + 2) – 3 = (x+ 4)x is a quadratic equation.
Solution :
Since  x(x + 2) – 3 = x(x + 4)
⇒ x2 + 2x – 3 = x2 + 4x
⇒ 2x + 3 = 0
This is linear equation not a quadratic equation.

Question 13.
Is x = -2 a solution of 3x2 + 13x + 14 = 0?
OR
State whether the equation (x + 1) (x – 2) + x = 0 has two distinct real roots or not. Justify your answer.
Solution :
Putting the value of x in the quadratic equation,
LHS = 3x2 + 13x + 14 = 3 (-2)2 + 13 (-2) + 14
= 12 – 26 + 14 = 0 = RHS
Hence, x = -2 is a solution.
OR
We have (x + 1) (x – 2) + x = 0
⇒ x2-x-2 + x= 0  ⇒ x2-2 = 0
D = b2 – 4ac = 0 – 4(1) (-2) = 8 > 0
∴ Given equation has two distinct real roots.

Question 14.
Two concentric circles of radii a and b (a> b) are given. Find the length of the chord of the larger circle which touches the smaller circle.
OR
In the given figure, CP and CQ are tangents from an external point C to a circle with centre O. AB is another tangent which touches the circle at R. If CP = 11 cm and BR = 4 cm, find the length of BC.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 9
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 10

OR
In the given figure, CP = CQ  [tangents drawn from an external point are equal]
So,  CP = CQ = 11 cm
Also,   BR = BQ   [tangents drawn from an external point are equal]
So,  BR = BQ = 4 cm
∴ Now, BC = CQ – BQ
= (11 -4) cm = 7 cm

Question 15.
Draw a line segment of length 6 cm. Using compasses and ruler, find a point P on it which divides it in the ratio 3:4.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 11
Steps of construction:
1. Draw a line segment AB = 6
2. Draw any ray AX making an acute angle XAB with AB.
3. Along AX mark 7 (3 + 4) points A1 A2, A3, A4,……………, A7 at equal distances such that
AA1 = A1A2 = A6A7
4. Join A7B
5. From A3, draw A3P parallel to A7B (by making an angle equal to ∠AA7B at A3) to meet AB at point P.
Then  AP : PB = 3 : 4.

Question 16.
The radius of a circle is 5 cm. Find the circumference of the circle whose area is 49 times the area of given circle.
Solution :
The area of the given circle = πr2 = π(5)2 = 25π sq. cm
Area of the other circle = 49 × 25π
Let the radius of this circle be R Then
Then πR2 = 49 x 25 x π  ⇒ R2 = (7)2 x (5)2
R = 7 x 5 = 35 cm
The required circumference = 2πR = 2 x \(\frac{22}{7}\) x 35 = 220 cm

Section-II

Case Study based questions are compulsory. Attempt any four sub-parts of each question. Each sub-part carries 1 mark.

Case Study Based-1

Question 17.
Treasure Island Shikha and Sanjana are playing a board game of

Treasure Island.
Shikha and Sanjana are playing a board game of Treasure Island.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 12
Refer to Skull Rock and Cave of Death
(a) The mid-point of the segment joining A(3, 5) and C(5, 3) is……..
(i) (2,3)
(ii) (3,5)
(iii) (4,3)

Refer to Three Palms
(b) The distance of point D(6, 4) from origin is
(i) \(5 \sqrt{7}\)units
(ii) \(7 \sqrt{5}\) units
(iii) \(4 \sqrt{10}\) units
(iv) \(2 \sqrt{23}\) units

Refer to 4-Cross Cliffs and Three Palms
(c) The distance between the points B(2,3)and D(6, 4) is
(i) \(\sqrt{13} \text { units }\)units
(ii) 4 units
(iii) \(5 \sqrt{3}\)units
(iv) \(\sqrt{17}\)units

(d) The coordinate of the point which divides the join of B(2,3) and D(6,4) in the ratio 2 : 3 is
(i) \(\left(\frac{13}{4}, \frac{19}{4}\right)\)
(ii) \(\left(\frac{18}{5}, \frac{17}{5}\right)\)
(iii) \(\left(\frac{11}{8}, \frac{13}{8}\right)\)
(iv) \(\left(\frac{19}{3}, \frac{16}{3}\right)\)

(e) If \(P\left(\frac{x}{3}, 4\right)\) is the mid-point of the line segment joining the points C(5,3) and
A(3, 5), then
(i) 8
(ii) 10
(iii) 12
(iv) 16
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 13
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 14

Case Study Based-2

Question 18.
What are you Smoking?
Given below is Air Quality Index of different localities of Delhi on 27th December 2019 by Times of India Newspaper on 28th. December 2019
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 15
The data recorded from above AQI (Air Quality Index) is given below:

AQI 310-320 320-330 330-340 340-350 350-360 360-370 370-380 380-390
Frequencies 2 4 3 4 5 7 5 4

(a) The sum of the lower limits of the median class and modal class is ……………
(i) 650
(ii) 660
(iii) 750
(iv) 710

(b) The modal class is …………
(i) 310-320
(ii) 330-340
(iii) 360-370
(iv) 380-390

(c) The upper limit of the median class is ………
(i) 330
(ii) 350
(iii) 360
(iv) 390

(d) The difference of the upper limit of the median class and the lower limit of the modal class is ……..
(i) 0
(ii) 1
(iii) 2
(iv) 3

(e) The mean AQI is ……..
(i) 335.8
(ii) 354.7
(iii) 360.4
(iv) 395.9
Solution :

Class Frequency Cumulative Frequency
310-320 2 2
320-330 4 6
330-340 3 9
340-350 4 13
350-360 5 18 ← Median Class
360-370 7 25 ← Model Class
370-380 5 30
380-390 4 34
n= 34

We have \(n=34, \frac{n}{2}=\frac{34}{2}=17\)

∴ The sum of the lower limits of the median class and modal class = 350 + 360 = 710 So, option
(iv) is the correct answer.

(b) Here, the maximum frequency is 7 and the corresponding class is 360-370.
So, modal class is 360-370. So, option (iii) is the correct answer.

(c) The median class is 350-360 which has upper limit 360. So, option (iii) is the correct answer.

(d) The difference between upper limit of the median class and the lower limit of the modal class = 360 – 360 = 0. So, option (i) is the correct answer.

(e)

Class Frequency (fi) Class Mark (xi)

fi xi

310-320 2 315 630
320-330 4 325 1300
330-340 3 335 1005
340-350 4 345 1380
350-360 5 355 1775
360-370 7 365 2555
370-380 5 375 1875
380-390 4 385 1540
∑fi = 34 ∑fxi = 12060

\(\text { Mean }=\frac{\sum f_{i} x_{i}}{\sum f_{i}}=\frac{12060}{34}=354.7(\text { approx. })\)
So, option (ii) is the correct answer.

Case Study Based-3

Question 19.
Skipping Rope
Skipping rope is a good exercise. It bums calories, makes bones strong and improves heart health.

During skipping, when rope goes up and down it makes the shape of parabolas (graphs of quadratic polynomials). Observe the following skipping pictures.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 16

Refer Picture 1
(a) The graph of polynomial p(x) represented by Picture 1 is shown below. The number of zeroes of the polynomial is
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 17
(i) 0
(ii) 1
(iii) 2
(iv) 4

Refer Picture 2
(b) The graph of polynomial p(x) represented by Picture 2 is shown below. Which of the following has negative (-) sign?
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 18
(i) a
(ii) b
(iii) c
(iv) All of there

(c) If \(\frac{1}{4}\) and 1 are the sum and product of zeroes of a polynomial whose graph is represented by Picture (3), the quadratic polynomial is
(i) \(k\left(x^{2}-\frac{1}{4} x-1\right)\)
(ii) \(k\left(\frac{1}{4} x^{2}-x-1\right)\)
(iii) \(k\left(x^{2}+\frac{1}{4} x+1\right)\)
(iv) \(k\left(\frac{1}{4} x^{2}+x+1\right)\)

(d) Let the Picture (1) represent the quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 – 8x + k whose sum of the
squares of zeroes is 40, The value of k is
(i) 8
(ii) 10
(iii) 12
(iv) 20

(e) Let the Picture (3) represent the quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 + 7x + 10. Then its zeroes are
(i) -1, -5
(ii) -2, -5
(iii) 1, 5
(iv) 2, 5
Solution :
(a) Since the graph y p(x) cuts the x-axis at two different points, so the polynomial has two zeroes. So, option (iii) is the correct answer.

(b) The parabola)’ = ax2 + bx + c open downwards. Therefore, a <O. The vertex \(\left(\frac{-b}{2 a}, \frac{-\mathrm{D}}{4 a}\right)\) of the parabola is on OX1.
\( \quad \frac{-b}{2 a}<0 \quad \Rightarrow b<0\)
Parabola y =p(x) cuts y-axis at P(O, c) which lies on OY’. Therefore e <O.
Hence, O, b <O and c< O.
So, option (iv) is the correct answer.

(c) We have sum \(\frac{1}{4}\) and product
\(f(x)=k\left(x^{2}-\frac{1}{4} x-1\right)\)
So, option (iii) is the correct answer.

(d) CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 46

(e) We have
x2 + 7x + 10 =x2 + 5x + 2x + 10 = x(x + 5) + 2(x + 5) = (x + 2)(x + 5)
Now, when x + 2 = 0 or x + 5 = 0, i.e., whenx = -2 andx = -5
Therefore, the zeroes of x2 + lx + 10 are -2 and -5

Question 20.

Fair Play
Garima has two children, Tapan and Maya. Every Sunday is a game night in the family. Tonight Garima has planned for a game with three cubes, one purple and two yellow. She placed the three cubes in a bag and called for her children.
Garima: Do you want to play a game of probability?
Maya: What is probability?
Garima: Let me ask you something before I answer you. Can you predict what is in this bag?
Tapan: I cannot guess that!
Maya: I am 100% sure it is a toy!
Garima: I am glad you think that Maya. Just now you used the concept of probability.
Whether an event can happen or not, can’t be predicted with total certainty. But we can always predict how- likely or unlikely it is for an event to happen.
And for predicting that, we use a concept called probability.
\(\text { Probability (an event to happen) }=\frac{\text { Number of ways event can happen }}{\text { Total number of ways all events can happen }}\)
Placing the bag of cubes in the centre, Garima explained the rules of the game to the children. Garima: Without looking, the first player will pick out a cube from the bag and then the second player will also pick out one cube without looking. If the two cubes picked out were the same colour, then the first person will win the game. If the boxes picked out are of two differently coloured cubes, then the second player will be the winner.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 19

(a) In the first round, Maya pulled out a cube, which was yellow. What is the probability that Tapan will win the game?
(i) \(\frac{1}{2}\)
(ii) \(\frac{1}{3}\)
(iii) \(\frac{2}{3}\)
(iv) 0

(b) in the second round, Tapan started by picking out a purple cube. What is the probability for Tapan to win the round?
(i) 1
(ii) \(\frac{1}{3}\)
(iii) 0
(iv) \(\frac{2}{3}\)

(c) In the third round, Maya pulled out a cube. The probability that the pulled out cube is not of yellow colour is
(i) 1
(ii) \(\frac{1}{2}\)
(iii) \(\frac{1}{3}\)
(iv) \(\frac{2}{3}\)

(d) In the fourth round, Tapan pulled out a cube. The probability that the pulled out cube is either purple or yellow is
(i) 1
(ii) \(\frac{1}{2}\)
(iii) \(\frac{1}{3}\)
(iv) \(\frac{2}{3}\)

(e) In the last round, Maya pulled out a cube. The probability that the pulled out cube is of green colour is
(i) 1
(ii) \(\frac{1}{2}\)
(iii) \(\frac{1}{3}\)
(iv) 0
Solution :
(a) After taking out one yellow cube, the bag is left with 1 yellow cube whose probability of pulling out \(\frac{1}{2}\) So, option (i) is the correct answer.

(b) After taking out one purple cube, the bag has no purple cube. So, the probability for Tapan to win the round is
\(\frac{0}{3}\) = 0
So, option (iii) is the correct answer.

(c) The number of yellow cube is 1. So, the probability of pulling out a cube not of yellow colour is \(\frac{1}{3}\)
So, option (iii) is the correct answer.

(d) The number of purple and yellow cubes =1 + 2 = 3.
∴ The required probability =\(\frac{3}{3}\) = 1
So, option (i) is the correct answer.

(e) The number of green cube = 0
.’. The required probability = \(\frac{0}{3}\) = 0
So, option (iv) is the correct answer.

Part-B
Section-III

All questions are compulsory. In case of internal choices, attempt any one.

Question 21.
Write a rational number between \(\sqrt{2} \text { and } \sqrt{3}\)
Solution :
We have  √2 =1.4142135…. and √3 = 1.7320508…
Since every terminating decimal or repeating decimal represents a rational number.
So, 1.666666… is a rational number between \(\sqrt{2} \text { and } \sqrt{3}\)
Also 1.5, 1.6, 1.7 are rational numbers between \(\sqrt{2} \text { and } \sqrt{3}\)

Question 22.
Find the ratio in which the point (-3, p) divides the line segment joining the points (-5,-4) and (-2,3).
Hence find the value of p.
OR
If the point C(-1, 2) divides internally the line segment joining A(2, 5) and B(x, y) in the ratio 3 : 4, find the coordinates of B.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 20

Question 23.
Find a quadratic polynomial whose zeroes are reciprocals of the zeroes of the polynomial f(x)=ax2+bx+c,a≠0,c≠0.
Solution :
Let the zeroes of the polynornial f(x) = ax2 + bx + c be α and β.
Then \(\alpha+\beta=\frac{-b}{a} \text { and } \alpha \beta=\frac{c}{a}\)
Now, the zeroes of the required polynomial are reciprocals of a and p.
∴ The required quadratic polynomial is given by
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 21

Question 24.
Draw a line segment AB of length 7 cm. Taking A as centre, draw a circle of radius 3 cm and taking B as centre, draw another circle of radius 2 cm. Construct tangents to each circle from the centre of the other circle.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 22
Steps of construction:
1. Draw a line segment AB of length 7 cm.
2. With A as centre, draw a circle of radius 3 cm.
3. With B as centre, draw a circle of radius 2 cm.
4. Draw the perpendicular bisector of AB. Let P be the mid-point of segment AB.
5. With P as centre and radius PA draw a circle which intersects the circle with centre A at M and the circle with centre B at R and S.
6. Join BM and BN. Also join AR and AS. Then, BM, BN, AR and AS are required tangents.

Question 25.
The rod AC of a TV disc antenna is fixed at right angles to the wall AB and a rod CD is supporting the disc as shown in figure. If AC = 1.5 m and CD = 3 m, then find
(a) tan θ
(b) sec  θ + cosec θ
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 23
If sin θ + cosθ = √3, then prove that tan θ + cot θ = 1.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 24

Question 26.
In the given figure, two tangents TP and TQ are drawn to a circle with centre O from an external point T
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 25
Prove that: ∠PTQ = ∠OPQ.
Solution :
We know that, tangents drawn from same external point are equal.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 26
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 27

Section-IV

Question 27.
Find HCF and LCM of 404 and 96 and verify that HCF x LCM = product of the two given numbers.
Solution :
404 = 2 x 2 x 101 =22 x 101
96 = 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 3 = 25 x3
∴ HCF of 404 and 96 = 22 = 4
LCM of 404 and 96 = 101 x 25 x 3 = 9696 HCF x LCM
= 4 x 9696 = 38784
Also   404 x 96 = 38784
Hence HCF x LCM = Product of 404 and 96.

Question 28.
If the roots of the equation (a – b)x2 + (b – c )x + (c – a) = 0 are equal, prove that 2a = b + c.
OR
The sum of the squares of two consecutive odd numbers is 394. Find the numbers.
Solution :
For real and equal roots, D = 0 ⇒ (b – c)2 – 4(a – b)(c -a) = 0
⇒ b2 + c2 – 2be – 4ac + 46c + 4a2 – 4ab = 0
⇒ 4a2 + b2 + c2 – 4ab + 2 be – 4ac = 0
⇒ (-2a)2 + (b)1 + (c)2 + 2(-2 a)b + 2 (b)(c) + 2c(-2a) = 0
⇒ ( – 2a + b + c)2 = 0  ⇒ – 2a + b + c = 0
⇒ 2 a = b + c
OR
Let the two consecutive odd numbers be x and x +2
x2 + (x + 2)2 = 394                                ⇒ x2 + x2 + 4 + 4x = 394
⇒ 2x2 + 4x + 4 = 394                            ⇒ 2x2 + 4x – 390 = 0
⇒  x2 + 2x – 195 = 0                               ⇒ x2 + 15x – 13x – 195 = 0
⇒ x (x + 15) – 13 (x + 15) = 0                ⇒ (x- 13) (x+ 15) = 0
x – 13 = 0                                                  ⇒ or x + 15 = 0
⇒  x= 13                                                   ⇒ or x = – 15 (neglected)

When the first number x = 13, then the second number x + 2 = 13 + 2= 15.

Question 29.
ABCD is a square of side 4 cm. At each comer of the square, a A quarter circle of radius 1 cm, and at the centre, a circle of radius 1 cm, are drawn, as shown in the given figure. Find the area of the shaded region.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 28
Solution :
Area of the shaded portion
= Area of given square ABCD
– 4 x area of each quarter circle
– area of the circle at the centre.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 29

Question 30.
In the given figure, \(\angle \mathrm{D}=\angle \mathrm{E} \text { and } \frac{\mathrm{AD}}{\mathrm{DB}}=\frac{\mathrm{AE}}{\mathrm{EC}}\) prove that ΔBAC is an isosceles triangle.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 30
OR
Prove that the sum of squares of the sides of a rhombus is equal to the sum of the squares of its diagonals.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 31
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 33

[ ∴ AB = BC = CD = AD, sides of a rhombus]
Hence, the sum of the squares of the sides of a rhombus is equal to the sum of the squares of its diagonals.

Question 31.
In the given figure, PA, QB, RC and SD are all perpendiculars to a line l, AB = 6 cm, BC = 9 cm, CD = 12 cm and SP = 36 cm. Find PQ, QR and RS.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 34

Solution :
If three or more line segments are perpendiculars to one line, then they are parallel to each other.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 35

Question 32.
The angle of elevation of the top of a tower from a certain point is 30°. If the observer moves 20 metres towards the tower, the angle of elevation of the top increases by 15°. Find the height of the tower.
Solution:
Let AB be the tower and angle of elevation from point C = 30°
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 36

Question 33.
The median of the following data is 525. Find the values ofx andy, if total frequency is 100.

Class 0-100 100-200 200-300 300-400 400-500 500-600 600-700 700-800 800-900 900-1000
Frequency 2 5 X 12 17 20 y 9 7 4

Solution:

Class Frequency cf
0-100 2 2
100-200 5 1
200-300 X 7 + x
300-400 12 19+x
400-500 17 36+x
500-600 20 56 +x
600-700 y 56 + x +y
700-800 9 65 + x + y
800-900 7 72 +x+y
900-1000 4 16+ x + y

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 37

Section – V

Question 34.
A vertical tower stands on a horizontal plane and is surmounted by a vertical flag-staff of height 6 m. At a point on the plane, the angle of elevation of the bottom and top of the flag­staff are 30° and 45° respectively. Find the height of the tower. (Take 73 = 1.73)
OR
A vertical tower stands on a horizontal plane and is surmounted by a flag-staff of height 5 m. From a point on the ground the angles of elevation of the top and bottom of the flag-staff are 60° and 30° respectively. Find the height of the tower and the distance of the point from base of the tower.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 38
Or

Let height of tower (TR) be x m, distance (RP) of a point from the base of tower be y m, height of the flag-staff (QT) be 5 m. Then in the ΔTRP,
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 39

Question 35.
A toy is in the form of a right circular cylinder with a hemisphere on one end and a cone on the other. The height and radius of the cylindrical part are 13 cm and 5 cm respectively. The radii of the hemispherical and conical parts are the same as that of the cylindrical part. Calculate the surface area of the toy if the height of the conical part is 12 cm.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 40
Solution :
Let r be the radius and h the height of the cylindrical part of the toy.
Then, r = 5 cm and h = 13 cm.
Let, r1 be the radius of the conical part, h1 its height and 1 its slant height.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 41
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 42

Question 36.
A boat goes 30 km upstream and 44 km downstream in 10 hours. In 13 hours, it can go 40 km upstream and 55 km downstream. Determine the speed of the stream and that of the boat in still water.
Solution :
Let the speed of the boat in still water be x km/h and the speed of the stream be y km/h.
∴ Speed of the boat going upstream = (x-y) km/h and
speed of the boat going downstream = (x + y) km/h
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 43
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 44
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Standard Set 3 with Solutions 45
On solving (v) and (vi), we get x = 8, y = 3
Hence, speed of the boat in still water = 8 km/h and speed of the stream = 3 km/h.

Molecular Basis of Inheritance Class 12 Important Extra Questions Biology Chapter 6

Here we are providing Class 12 Biology Important Extra Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance. Important Questions for Class 12 Biology are the best resource for students which helps in Class 12 board exams.

Class 12 Biology Chapter 6 Important Extra Questions Molecular Basis of Inheritance

Molecular Basis of Inheritance Important Extra Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
Name the genetic material for the majority of organisms.
Answer:
DNA (Deoxyribose nucleic acid)

Question 2.
List the function of RNA.
Answer:
RNA acts as genetic material in viruses and also functions as an adapter, structural, and in some cases as a catalytic molecule.

Question 3.
How many nucleotides are present in a bacteriophage Φ × 174?
Answer:
5386.

Question 4.
List the number of base pairs in:
(i) lambda bacteriophage
Answer:
48502 bp

(ii) E.coli and
Answer:
4.6 × 106bp

(iii) haploid content of human DNA.
Answer:
3.3 × 109bp.

Question 5.
Comment two chains of DNA have antiparallel polarity.
Answer:
If one chain has 5′ → 3′ polarity, the other chain has 3′ → 5′ polarity.

Question 6.
What is the difference between DNA and DNAase?
Answer:
DNAs are the number of molecules of DNA and DNAase is an enzyme that digests DNA.

Question 7.
What made DNA as genetic material?
Answer:
As RNA was unstable, it evolved further with certain chemical modifications and formed DNA. DNA became more stable.

Question 8.
What is the average rate of polymerization?
Answer:
2000 bp per second.

Question 9.
List three components of the transcription unit.
Answer:

  1. A promoter,
  2. The structural gene,
  3. A terminator.

Question 10.
What is the term used for fully processed hn RNA?
Answer:
A messenger RNA (mRNA).

Question 11.
What is splicing?
Answer:
It is the removal of introns and the joining of exons in a definite manner.

Question 12.
Where are UTRs present in mRNA strand?
Answer:
UTRs (Untranslated region) are present at both 5′ end (before start codon) and at the 3′ end (after stop signal).

Question 13.
Write the significance of UTRs.
Answer:
They are required for the regulation of an efficient translation process.

Question 14.
Name any two non-sense codons (stop signal).
Answer:

  1. UGA (Opal)
  2. UAA (Ochre).

Question 15.
What are the exceptions to the general rule that DNA is the genetic material in all organisms? Give evidence that supports these exceptions.
Answer:
Some animal viruses and all plant viruses contain RNA as their genetic material.

Question 16.
What is a replication fork? (CBSE, Delhi 2011)
Answer:
When replication starts the two strands of DNA unwind to form a Y-shaped structure called the replication fork.

Question 17.
Name the technique by which Gene expression can be controlled with the help of RNA molecule. (CBSE Sample Paper 2018-19)
Answer:
Northern blotting

Question 18.
Name the parts ‘A’ and ‘B’ of the transcription unit given below. (C.B.S.E. Delhi 2008)
Answer:
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 1
A-Promoter
B-Coding strand.

Question 19.
Mention the role of the codons AUG and UGA during protein synthesis. (CBSE 2011, 2016)
Or
Mention two functions of codon AUG. (CBSE 2010)
Answer:

  1. AUG acts as a start signal and also code for methionine amino acid.
  2. UGA acts as a stop signal.

Question 20.
How do histones acquire positive charge? (CBSE Delhi 2011)
Answer:
A histone protein acquires a positive charge because they are rich in basic amino acid residues such as lysine, arginine, and histidine. All are positively charged in their side chains.

Question 21.
Why do DNA fragments move towards the anode during gel electrophoresis? (CBSE Delhi 2018C)
Answer:
DNA molecule is negatively charged. When placed in an electric field it moves towards a positively charged anode.

Question 22.
Name one amino acid which is coded by only one codon. (CBSE Delhi 2018 C)
Answer:
Methionine – AUG/ Tryptophan – UGG

Molecular Basis of Inheritance Important Extra Questions Short Answer Type

Question 1.
If the sequence of coding strand In a transcription unit Is written as follows: (CBSE Delhi 2011)
5′- A T G C A T G C A T G C A T G C A T G C A T G C A T G C – 3′
Write down the sequence of mRNA.
Answer:
The sequence of mRNA shall be:
5′ – U A C G U A C G U A C G U A C G U A C G U A C G U A C G – 3′.

Question 2.
What is Chargaff rule? (CBSE Delhi 2011)
Answer:
Chargaff Rules:

  1. In DNA molecule, A — T base pairs equals in number to G — C base pairs.
  2. A + G = T + C, i.e. purines and pyrimidines equal in amount.
  3. A = T and C = G (Amount).
  4. The base ratio A + T/G + C may vary from one species to another but is constant for each species. It helps in identifying the source of DNA.
  5. The deoxyribose sugar and phosphate component occur in equal proportions.

Question 3.
(a) Name the component of a nucleotide responsible for giving 5’— 3′ polarity to a polynucleotide.
Answer:
A polymer has at one end a free phosphate moiety at 5′- end of ribose sugar which is referred to as 5′-end of a polynucleotide chain. Similarly, at the other end of the polymer, the ribose has a free 3-OH group which is referred to as the 3′-end of a polynucleotide chain.

(b) Where in a nucleotide is the glycosidic bond present? (CBSE Delhi 2019 C)
Answer:
A nitrogenous base is linked to pentose sugar through an N-glycosidic linkage to form nucleoside.

Question 4.
Which property of DNA double helix led Watson and Crick to hypothesize a semi-conservative model of DNA replication? Explain.
Or
Write a note on the semi-conservative mode of DNA replication. (CBSE Delhi 2008; Delhi 2011, 2014)
Answer:
The semi-conservative model of DNA replication hypothesized by Watson and Crick was based upon the property that during replication, the two strands would separate and act as a template for the synthesis of new complementary strands. After the completion of replication, each DNA molecule would have one parental and one newly synthesized strand. This scheme was termed as ‘Semi-conservative’ DNA replication.

Question 5.
RNA was the first genetic material, DNA evolved later on. Explain.
Or
Why is RNA considered the first genetic material? (CBSE, 2009 2012)
Answer:
RNA was the first genetic material. There is now enough evidence to suggest that essential life processes (such as metabolism, translation, splicing, etc.) evolved around RNA. RNA used to act as a genetic material as well as a catalyst (there are some important biochemical reactions in living systems that are catalyzed by RNA catalysts and not by protein enzymes). But, RNA being a catalyst was reactive and hence unstable. Therefore, DNA has evolved from RNA with chemical modifications that make it more stable. DNA being double-stranded and having complementary strands further resists changes by evolving a process of repair.

Question 6.
Discuss the significance of the heavy isotope of nitrogen in Meselson and Stahl’s experiment.
Answer:

  1. By using the heavy isotope of nitrogen, they could find out the semiconservative nature of DNA replication as the densities of DNA having 15N in both the strands 15N/14N DNA and 14N/14N DNA were all different.
  2. The hybrid DNA (15N/14N DNA) had a density intermediate between that of heavy DNA (15N/15N DNA) and that of light/normal DNA (14N/14N DNA).

Question 7.
Differentiate polycistronic mRNA and monocistronic mRNA.
Answer:
Differences between polycistronic mRNA and monocistronic mRNA:

Polycistronic mRNA Monocistronic mRNA
1. It is the mRNA that can code for only one polypeptide, i.e. it has one cistron 1. It is the mRNA that can code for more than one polypeptide, i.e. it has more than one cistron.
2. It is normally found in eukaryotic cells. 2. It is found in prokaryotic cells.

Question 8.
You are repeating the Hershey-Chase experiment and are provided with two isotopes 32p and 15N (in place of 35S in the original experiment). How do you expect your results to be different?
Answer:

  1. The use of 15N will not give any conclusive result because it is only a heavy isotope of nitrogen.
  2. In the original experiment, 35S was detected only in the supernatant as it was incorporated in protein only, while 15N will be incorporated into proteins as well as in DNA and hence it would appear both in the supernatant and in the sediment as well.

Question 9.
What is DNA fingerprinting? Mention its applications.
Or
List any two applications of the DNA fingerprinting technique. (CBSE Delhi 2018)
Answer:
DNA fingerprinting: The technique of using DNA fragments, resulting from restriction endonuclease enzyme cleavage to identify particular individuals, is called DNA fingerprinting.

Applications of DNA Fingerprinting:

  1. Paternity disputes can be solved by DNA fingerprinting.
  2. It can solve the problems of evolution.
  3. It can be used to study the breeding patterns of animals facing the danger of extinction.
  4. It is useful in restoring the health of the patients suffering from leukemia (blood cancer).
  5. It is very useful in the detection of crime and legal pursuits.

Question 10.
What are the major enzymes of DNA replication? (CBSE 2009)
Answer:
Enzymes of DNA Replication:

  1. DNA-dependent DNA polymerase. It catalyzes the polymerization of deoxynucleotides,
  2. Okazaki fragments, which are then quickly joined together by an enzyme known as DNA ligase.
  3. The discovery of helicases and topoisomerase enzymes explains the unwinding of the DNA helix.

Question 11.
One of the codons on mRNA is AUG. Draw the structure of the tRNA adapter molecule for this codon. Explain the uniqueness of this tRNA. (CBSE Delhi and Outside Delhi, 2008)
Answer:
Transfer RNA or soluble RNA or Adapter RNA (tRNA or sRNA). It constitutes 15% of total RNA and is the smallest out of three with only 70-85 nucleotides having a sedimentation coefficient of 45.

It is unique because it has double specificity, one for codon on mRNA strand and the other for the corresponding amino acid.

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 2
Structure of tRNA adapter

Question 12.
Briefly describe the termination of a polypeptide chain. (C8SE 2009)
Answer:
Termination of polypeptide synthesis:

  1. When one of the termination codons (UAA, UAG, UGA) comes at the A-site, it does not code for any amino acid and there is no tRNA molecule for it.
  2. As a result, the polypeptide synthesis (or elongation of the polypeptide) stops.
  3. The polypeptide synthesized is released from the ribosome, catalyzed by a ‘release factor’.

Question 13.
Write the dual purpose served by Deoxyribonucleoside triphosphates in polymerization. (CBSE Delhi 2018)
Answer:
Deoxyribonucleoside triphosphates serve as substrates, i.e. nucleotides during replication, and also provide energy for polymerization reaction by cleavage of high energy terminal phosphates bond. Thus they serve dual purposes.

Question 14.
Although a prokaryotic cell has no defined nucleus, yet DNA is not scattered throughout the cell. Explain. (CBSE Delhi 2018)
Answer:
In the nucleoid region, DNA that is negatively charged is held with some proteins that are positively charged. The DNA in the nucleoid is organized in large loops held by proteins. And the DNA in the form of single chromosomes is attached to the mesosome at a point. 15

Question 15.
Differentiate between the genetic codes given below:
(i) Unambiguous and Universal
Answer:

  • Unambiguous: The code is specific, i.e. one Condon code for onLy one amino acid.
  • Universal: The code is the same in aLL organisms.

(ii) Degenerate and Initiator (CBSE Delhi 2017)
Answer:

  • Degenerate: When an amino acid is coded by more than one codon, it is said to be degenerate.
  • Initiator: AUG is an initiator codon, i.e. it initiates the translation process and also codes for methionine.

Question 16.
Why does the lac operon shut down sometime after the addition of lactose in the medium where E.coti was growing? Why low-level expression of the lac operon is always required? (CBSE Sample Paper 2018-19)
Answer:
After the addition of lactose, a complete breakdown of lactose to glucose and galactose takes place. Therefore, there is no more lactose to bind to the repressor protein and the lac operon shuts down.

A very low level of expression of lac operon has to be present in the cell all the time, otherwise, lactose cannot enter the cells.

Question 17.
Carefully examine structures A and B of pentose sugar given below. Which one of the two is more reactive? Give reasons. (CBSE Sample Paper 2019-20)

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 3

 

 

 

 

 

 

Answer:
The pentose sugar of figure A is more reactive.
Reasons:

 

  1. There are two -OH groups present in the pentose sugar.
  2. It makes it more labile.
  3. It is easily degradable.

Molecular Basis of Inheritance Important Extra Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
(i) How are the following formed and involved in DNA packaging in a nucleus of a cell?
(a) Histone octamer
(b) Nucleosome
(c) Chromatin
Answer:
Packaging of DNA.
(a) Histone octamer: Five types of histone proteins (H1, H2A, H2B, H3, and H4) are involved. Out of these, four of them H1 A, H2 B, H3, and H4 occur in pairs to produce histone octamer also called the nu body. Histones are organized in a form of a compact unit formed of 8 molecules hence called histone octamer.

(b) Nucleosome: The unit of compaction of DNA is the nucleosome. About 146 bp of DMA is wrapped
over histone octamer for 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\) turn to form nucleosome of the size 110 × 60 A.

(c) Chromatin: Linker DNA connects two adjacent nucleosomes. It bears H1 protein. As a result, a chain is formed called chromatic. Nucleosome chain gives ‘beads on string’ appearance under the electron microscope. Chromatin are repeating units of a structure located on the nucleosome.

(ii) Differentiate between Euchromatin: 1 and Heterochromatin. (CBSE Delhi 2016)
Answer:

Heterochromatin Euchromatin
1. Darkly stained. 1. lightly stained.
2. Condensed regions of chromatin fibers. 2. less tightly coiled regions of chromatin fibers.
3. Transcriptionatty inactive or less active. 3. Transcnptionally active.
4. less affected by temperature, sex, or age. it is not acetylated. 4. More affected by temperature, sex, or age. It is acetylated during interphase.

Question 2.
Distinguish between heterochromatin and euchromatin. Which of the two is transcriptionally active?
Answer:
Differences between heterochromatin and euchromatin:

Heterochromatin Euchromatin
1. Darkly stained. 1. lightly stained.
2. Condensed regions of chromatin fibers. 2. less tightly coiled regions of chromatin fibers.
3. Transcriptionatty inactive or less active. 3. Transcnptionally active.
4. less affected by temperature, sex, or age. it is not acetylated. 4. More affected by temperature, sex, or age. It is acetylated during interphase.

Euchromatin is more active transcriptionally.

Question 3.
Write a note on messenger RNA.
Answer:
Messenger RNA (mRNA).
It forms only 5% of total RNA but is the longest of all. It brings instructions from DNA for the formation of a particular polypeptide. The instructions are coded in the form of a base sequence called genetic code. Three adjacent nitrogen bases specify a particular amino acid. The formation of polypeptides occurs over the ribosomes. mRNA gets attached to ribosomes.
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 4

mRNA.

It starts as a cap for attachment with the ribosome. It is followed by an initiation codon (AUG) either immediately or after a small non-coding region. It is followed by the coding region followed by the termination codon (UAA, UAG, and UGA). Then there is a small non-coding region and poly-A area at 3 termini. The mRNA may specify only a single polypeptide or a number of them called monocistronic and polycistronic respectively.

The life span of mRNA maybe a few minutes to an hour or even days in the case of RBC.

Question 4.
What is genetic code? List the properties of genetic code.
Answer:
The code language of DNA and mRNA is complementary. So, genetic code is the sequence of nucleotides in DNA and RNA that determines the amino acid sequence in proteins. Some amino acids are specified by more than one codon. The sequence of nucleotide on the tRNA molecule which complements the codon is called anticodon, e.g. one of the codons for the amino acid leucine is CUG and the anticodon is GAC. Similarly, the codon for phenylalanine is UUU, while the anticodon is AAA.

Properties of genetic code:
The following properties of genetic code have now been proved by experimental evidence.

  1. The code is a triplet.
  2. The code is degenerate.
  3. The code is non¬overlapping.
  4. The code is commaless.
  5. The code is non-ambiguous.
  6. The code is universal,
  7. Collinearity.

Both polypeptide and DNA or mRNA have a linear arrangement of their components.

The term code letter stands for a nucleotide A, T, G, or C in DNA and A, U, G, or C in RNA. The sequence of three does not code for any amino acid, such codons are called a non-sense codon, e.g. UGA.

Question 5.
What is the role of ribosomes during translation? Ribosomes move along mRNA molecules and catalyze the assembly of amino acids into protein chambers. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Role of ribosomes: Ribosomes usually form linear or helical groups during active protein synthesis called polyribosomes or polysomes. The mRNA strand having coded information joins along with smaller subunits of ribosomes. The adjacent ribosomes are 360 A apart.

The different parts of the ribosome connected with protein synthesis are:

  1. A tunnel for mRNA.
  2. A groove for the passage of newly synthesized polypeptide (larger subunit).
  3. Two active sites (P-site-peptidyl transfer or donor site and A-site or aminoacyl or acceptor site).
  4. A binding site for tRNA near A-site.
  5. Presence of enzyme peptidyl transferase.
  6. Recognition point of smaller subunit for mRNA.
  7. Presence of GTP-ase, binding sites for elongation factors, and translocases.

Question 6.
Describe the steps in the sequencing of the human genome.
Answer:
Sequencing of a genome.
The method involved two major approaches:

  1. Expressed Sequence Tags (ESTs): It is focused on identifying all the genes that are expressed as RNAs.
  2. Sequence Annotation: It involves simply sequence the whole set of the genome that included all the coding and non-coding sequences and then assigning functions to different regions in the sequence.

HGP followed the second technique:

  1. The total DNA from the cell is isolated and converted into random fragments of relatively smaller sizes.
  2. These fragments are then cloned in suitable hosts using specialized vectors; the commonly used hosts are bacteria and yeast and the vectors are bacterial artificial chromosomes (BAC) and yeast artificial chromosomes (YAC).
  3. The fragments are then sequenced using automated DNA sequences.
  4. The sequences were then arranged on the basis of certain overlapping regions present in them; this required the generation of overlapping fragments for sequencing.
  5. These sequences are annotated and assigned to the respective chromosomes.

Question 7.
(i) Why is DNA molecule a more stable genetic material than RNA? Explain.
Answer:
There is now enough evidence to suggest that essential life processes (such as metabolism, translation, splicing, etc.) revolved around RNA. RNA used to act as a genetic material as well as a catalyst (there are some important biochemical reactions in living systems that are catalyzed by RNA catalyst and not by protein enzymes). But, RNA being a catalyst was reactive and hence unstable. Therefore, DNA has evolved from RNA with chemical modifications that make it more stable. DNA being double-stranded and having complementary strands further resists changes by evolving a process of repair.

(ii) ‘Unambiguous’, ‘degenerate’ and ‘universal’ are some of the salient features of genetic code. Explain. (CBSE 2008, 2011, Delhi 2014, 2016)
Answer:
Unambiguous: Each codon codes for one amino acid, none for more than one.

Degenerate: One amino acid often has more than one triplet codon; only methionine and tryptophan have a single triplet codon.

Universal: The genetic code is universal. A given codon in DNA and m RNA specifies the same amino acid in all organisms from viruses, bacteria to human beings.

Question 8.
Explain the role of tRNA in the initiation of protein synthesis. (CBSE 2012)
Answer:
Role of tRNA’ in the initiation of protein synthesis:

  1. tRNA is an adapter molecule that on one hand would bind to a specific amino acid.
  2. The tRNA then called sRNA (soluble RNA).
  3. tRNA has an anticodon loop that has bases complementary to the code.
  4. It has an amino acid acceptor end to which it binds to an amino acid.
  5. tRNAs are specific for each amino acid.
  6. For initiation, there is another tRNA, that is referred to as initiator tRNA.
  7. Amino acids are activated in the presence of ATP and joined to their corresponding tRNA it is called charging of tRNA or aminoacylation of tRNA.
  8. Two such charged tRNAs are brought close and the formation of peptide bond occurs.

Question 9.
List the criteria that can act as genetic material must fulfill. Which one of the criteria is best fulfilled by DNA or RNA thus making one of them a better genetic material? Explain. (CBSE (Delhi) 2016)
Answer:
Essential requirements of genetic material:

  1. A genetic material should be able to store and express information to confer the heritable characters of living organisms.
  2. It should be capable to make its own replica.
  3. Genetic material should also have the mechanism to undergo mutations that will generate variations.

Question 10.
A small stretch of DNA strand that codes for a polypeptide are shown below:
3’— — — — CAT CAT AGA TGA AAC — — — — 5’
(a) Which type of mutation could have occurred in each type resulting in the following mistakes during rep¬lication of the above original se¬quence?
(i) 3’ … … … … CAT CAT AGA TGA ATC … … … 5’
Answer:
A point mutation (single base substitution)

(ii) 3’ … … … … CAT ATA GAT GAA AC … … … 5’
Answer:
A point mutation (single base deletion)

(b) How many amino acids will be translated from each of the above strands (i) and (ii)? (CBSE Sample Paper 2019-20)
Answer:
(i) 4 amino acids
(ii) 4 amino acids

Question 11.
(i) In the human genome which one of the chromosomes has the most genes and which one has the fewest?
Answer:
Chromosome 1 has the most genes (2968) and Y-chromosome has the least gene (231).

(ii) Scientists have identified about 1.4 million single nucleotide polymorphs in the human genome. How is the information of their existence going to help the scientists? (CBSE2009)
Answer:
This information promises to revolutionize the processes of finding the chromosomal location for disease-associated sequences and tracing human history.

Question 12.
Describe the structure of an RNA polynucleotide chain having four different types of nucleotides. (CBSE Delhi 2013, 2019)
Answer:

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 5
RNA polynucleotide

RNA polynucleotide:

  1. RNA is formed of polynucleotides of ribose series.
  2. Each nucleotide is formed of a nitrogen base, ribose sugar (pentose), and phosphoric acid.
  3. There are two types of nitrogen bases-purines and pyrimidines.
  4. Adenine (A) and Guanine (G) are purines.
  5. Cytosine (C) and Uracil (U) are pyrimidines.
  6. The nitrogen base is linked to pentose sugar by N-glycosidic linkage to form nucleoside.
  7. When a phosphate group is linked to 5′ -OH of a nucleoside through phosphodiester linkage thus forms nucleotide.
  8. Nucleotides of ribose series present are AMP, GMP, CMP, and UMP.
  9. Two nucleotides are linked through 3′ – 5′ phosphodiester linkage to form dinucleotides.
  10. More nucleotides can be joined in such a manner to form a polynucleotide chain.

Question 13.
Describe the initiation process of transcription in bacteria. (CBSE 2010, 2016, 2019)
Answer:
Initiation of transcription in bacteria:

  1. The process of copying genetic information from antisense or template strands of DNA into RNA is called transcription.
  2. The segment of DNA that takes part in transcription is called the transcription unit. It has three components
    (a) a promoter,
    (b) the structural gene and
    (c) a terminator.
  3. The structural gene is composed of that strand of DNA that has 3′ → 5′ polarity as transcription can occur only in the 5′ → 3′ direction.
  4. Transcription requires a DNA-dependent-RNA polymerase and initiation factor.
  5. Bacteria have only one type of RNA polymerase which transcribes all three types of RNAs.
  6. Ribonucleotides of ribose series are activated through phosphorylation (ATP, GTP, CTP, UTP).
  7. Transcription begins at the initiation site. A promotor has an RNA polymerase recognition site and it binds to the specific site.
  8. Enzymes required for the unwinding of the chain are unwound and single-stranded binding proteins.
  9. Nucleotides are added as per the base-pairing rule.

Question 14.
State the role of VNTRs in DNA fingerprinting. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2013)
Answer:
Role of Variable Number of Tandem Repeats (VNTRs) Short nucleotide repeats in the DNA are very specific in each individual and vary in number from person to person but are inherited. These are the ‘Variable Number Tandem Repeats’ (VNTRs). These are also called ‘minisatellites. Each individual inherits these repeats from his/her parents which are used as genetic markers in a personal identity test.

For example, a child might inherit a chromosome with six tandem repeats from the mother and the same tandem repeated four times in the homologous chromosome inherited from the father. The half of VNTR alleles of the child resemble that of the mother and half that of the father.

Question 15.
(i) List the two methodologies which were involved in the human genome project. Mention how they were used.
Answer:
(a) Expressed Sequence Tags (ESTs): This method focuses on identifying all the genes that are expressed as RNA.
(b) Sequence Annotation: It is a method of simply sequencing the whole set of the genome that contains all the coding and non-coding sequences, and then assigning different regions in the sequence with functions.

(ii) Expand ‘YAC’ and mention what it was used for. (CBSE Delhi 2017)
Answer:
‘YAC’ is an abbreviated form of ‘Yeast Artificial Chromosome’. It is used as a cloning vector for cloning DNA fragments in a suitable host so that DNA sequencing can be done.

Question 16.
Summarise the process by which the sequence of DNA bases in the Human Genome Project was determined using the method developed by Frederick Sanger. Name a free-living non-pathogenic nematode whose DNA has been completely sequenced. (CBSE Sample Paper 2019-20)
Answer:
(a) The HGP strategy:

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 6

(b) Chromosome 1
(c) Caenorhabditis elegans

Question 17.
Why is a DNA molecule considered a better hereditary material than an RNA molecule? (CBSE Delhi 2018C
Answer:
DNA is the better hereditary material compared to RNA because of the following features:

  1. DNA molecule is more stable tha> RNA (as thymine is present here instead of uracil found in RNA).
  2. DNA is less reactive than RNA (a- does not have 2’ OH group wl makes RNA very reactive).
  3. Since DNA is less reactive so it is t easily degradable.
  4. Chances of mutation are less. compared to RNA.

Question 18.
Name the three RNA polymerases found in eukaryotic cells and mention their functions. (CBSE Delhi 2018C)
Answer:

  • RNA polymerase I – It transcribes ribosomal RNAs (28S, 18S, 5.8S rRNAs)
  • RNA polymerase II – It transcribes precursors of mRNA – heterogeneous nuclear RNA (hnRNA)
  • RNA polymerase III – It transcribes transfer RNA (tRNA), 5SrRNAand small nuclear RNAs (snRNAs)

Question 19.
Explain the post-transcriptional modifications the hn-RNA undergoes in eukaryotic cells. (CBSE Delhi 2018C)
Answer:
In eukaryotes, the primary transcript is not functional due to the presence of exons and introns. Therefore it requires certain modifications to make it functional. First of all, introns are removed and the remaining exons are joined together in order by the process called Splicing.

Then the hnRNA undergoes capping followed by tailing. In capping, methyl guanosine triphosphate is added to the 5’ end of hnRNA. In tailing 200 -300 adenylate residues are added to 3’ end in a template-independent manner. Now the hnRNA has been processed into mRNA.

Question 20.
What are the aims of bioinformatics?
Answer:
Aims of bioinformatics:

  1. To spread scientifically investigated knowledge for the benefit of the research community.
  2. To transform the biological polymeric sequences into sequences of digital symbols and to store them as databases.
  3. To develop a variety of methods and tools of software for data analysis.

Question 21.
Describe Griffith’s experiment to demonstrate that DNA is the basic genetic material. What explanation for Griffith’s observation was given by Avery, McCarty, and MacCleod? (CBSE Delhi 2008, 2009, 2012)
Answer:
Griffith’s experiment demonstrates DNA as genetic material. Transformation experiments were initially conducted by F. Griffith in 1928.

  1. He injected a mixture of two strains of Pneumococcus (Diplococcus pneumoniae) into mice. One of these two strains S III was virulent and the other strain All was non-virulent.
  2. The S III type bacteria when injected into mice cause pneumonia and ultimately to death. The R II type bacteria when injected, no pneumonia occurred.
  3. The S III bacteria, prior to injection are killed by heating. It is then injected into the mice. It did not cause the disease.
  4. Heat killed S III and RII (non-virulent) bacteria, when injected into mice, causing pneumonia. Finally, death occurred.

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 7

Griffith’s experiment demonstration transformation in Pneumococcus.

This proved that the DNA of S III type bacteria has transformed the DNA of R II type bacteria into virulent type S III. This phenomenon of transferring characters of one strain to another by using a DNA extract of the former is called transformation. Conclusion. Griffith concluded that virulence was transferred from S-Type dead cells to R-Type living cells in the form of a capsule (some component of a cell) rather than the whole cells.

Contribution of Avery, MacCleod, and MacCarty: Avery, MacCleod, and McCarty gave the proof that the “transforming agent” is DNA. They carried out the experiments with Diplococcus and showed the transformation of type R-ll to type S-III. They found that proteases and RNases did not affect transformation but DNAses affect it. Thus they gave proof that the active component was DNA and not the RNA, proteins, or polysaccharides.

Question 22.
How did Hershey and Chase differentiate between DNA and protein in their experiment while proving that DNA is the genetic material? (CBSE 20015)
Or
Why did Hershey and Chase use 35S and 32P in their experiment? Explain. State the importance of blending and centrifugation in their experiment. Write the conclusion they arrived at after completing their experiment. (CBSE 20019 C)
Or
Hershey and Chase carried out their experiment under three steps: (a) Infection, (b) Blending, and (c) Centrifugation.
Or
Explain each one of these steps that helped them to prove that DNA is the hereditary material. (CBSE (Outside Delhi) 2019)
Answer:
1. Alfred Hershey and Martha Chase (1952) worked with viruses that infect bacteria called bacteriophages.

2. They used radioactive sulfur (35S) to identify protein and radioactive phosphorus (32P) to identify the components of nucleic acid.

3. The tadpole-shaped bacteriophage attaches to the bacteria. Its genetic material enters the bacterial cell by dissolving the cell wall of bacteria. The bacterial cell treats the viral genetic material as if it was it’s own and subsequently manufactures more virus particles.

4. Infection: They grew some viruses on a medium that contained radioactive phosphorus and others on a medium that contained radioactive sulfur.

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 8
The Hershey—Chase Experiment

5. Viruses grown in the presence of radioactive phosphorus contained radioactive DNA but not radioactive protein because DNA contains phosphorus but protein does not. Similarly, viruses grown on radioactive sulfur contained radioactive protein but not radioactive DNA because DNA does not contain sulfur.

6. Radioactive phages were allowed to attach to E. co/i bacteria. Then as the infection proceeded, the viral coats were removed from the bacteria by agitating them in a blender. The virus particles were separated from the bacteria by spinning them in a centrifuge.

7. Bacteria that were infected with viruses that had radioactive DNA were radioactive, indicating that DNA was the material that passed from the virus to the bacteria.

8. Bacteria that were infected with viruses that had radioactive proteins were not radioactive.

9. This indicates that proteins did not enter the bacteria from the viruses.

10. DNA is, therefore, the genetic material that is passed from virus to bacteria.

Question 23.
List the characteristics of DNA molecules.
Answer:
Characteristics of DNA molecule:

  1. The two chains are spirally coiled about around a common axis to form a regular, right-handed double helix.
  2. The double helix has a major groove and minor groove alternately.
  3. The helix is 20Å wide; it’s one complete turn is 34Å long, and has 10 base pairs, and the successive base pairs are 3.4Å apart.
  4. The two chains are complementary to each other with respect to base sequence.
  5. The two strands are hydrogen-bonded: A on one chain is joined to T on the other chain by 2 hydrogen
    bonds; C on one chain is linked to G on the other chain by 3 hydrogen bonds.
  6. The two strands run in an antiparallel direction.
  7. The amount of A + G = the amount of T + C; the amount of A = the amount of T: the amount of G = the amount of C. Sugar and phosphate groups occur in equal proportion.
  8. The DNA molecule is remarkably stable due to hydrogen bonding and hydrophobic interactions.
  9. The DNA molecule undergoes denaturation and renaturation easily.
  10. The denatured DNA strands are hyperchromic.
  11. The DNA molecule can replicate and repair itself, and can also transcribe RNAs.
  12. The base sequence of one chain serves as the genetic code.
  13. The DNA can function in vitro.
  14. The amount of DNA per nucleus is constant in all the body cells of a given species.

Question 24.
How is a long DNA molecule adjusted in a nucleus? (CBSE Delhi 2008)
Or
(i) What is this diagram representing?
(ii) Name the parts A, B, and C.
(iii) In the eukaryotes, the DNA molecules are organized within the nucleus. How is the DNA molecule organized in a bacterial cell in the ab¬sence of a nucleus? (CBSE 2009)

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 9

Answer:
The distance between two consecutive base pairs is 0.34 nm (0.34 × 10-9 m). If the length of DNA double helix in a typical mammalian cell is calculated (simply by multiplying the total number of bp with the distance between two consecutive bp, that is, 6.6 × 109 bp × 0.34 × 1(T9 m/bp), it comes out to be approximately 2.2 meters. A length that is far greater than a dimension of a typical nucleus (approx 10-6 m).

In eukaryotes, this organization is much more complex. There is a set of positively charged, basic proteins called ‘histones’. A protein acquires charge depending upon the abundance of amino acid residues with charged side chains. Histones are rich in amino acid residues lysines and arginines. Both the amino acid residues carry positive charges in their side chains. Histone organized to form a unit of eight histone molecules called ‘histone octamer’. The negatively charged DNA is wrapped around positively charged histone-octamer to form a structure called ‘Nucleosome’.

A typical nucleosome contains 200 bp of DNA helix. Nucleosomes constitute the repeating unit of a structure in the nucleus called ‘Chromatin’, thread-like stained (colored) bodies seen in the nucleus. The nucleosomes in chromatin are seen as a “beads-on-string” structure when viewed under an electron microscope (EM).
Or
(i) Nucleosome

(ii)

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 10

(iii) Organization of DNA molecule in bacteria. In prokaryotes like bacteria which lacks a nucleus, DNA is not scattered. The negatively charged DNA binds with positively charged proteins in a region called a nucleoid.

Question 25.
Describe briefly the mechanism of DNA replication. (CBSE (Delhi) 2019)
Or
Draw a labeled diagram of the replication fork. (CBSE 2011)
Or
Draw a neat labeled sketch of replicating fork of DNA.
Or
(a) Why does DNA replication occur within a replication fork and not in its entire length simultaneously?
(b) “DNA replication is continuous and discontinues on the two strands within the replication fork.” Give reasons. (CBSE (Outside Delhi) 2019)
Answer:
Mechanism of DNA replication. Watson and Crick, while explaining their model of DNA structure, suggested the semi-conservative mechanism of its replication. The quality and quantity of DNA in parent and daughter cells must be the same.

Replication is one of the most important properties of DNA and forms the very basis of life:
1.  Replication takes place during the S-phase of the interphase between two mitotic cycles.

2. Replication is a semi-conservative process in which each of the two double helices formed from the parent double strand has one old and one new strand. Repair replication is non-conservative.

3. DNA replication requires a DNA template, a primer, deoxyribonucleoside triphosphates (dATP, dGTP, dTTP, dCTP), Mg++, DNA unwinding protein, superhelix relaxing protein, a modified RNA polymerase to synthesize the RNA primer, a joining polynucleotide ligase, enzyme.

4. Watson and Crick suggested that the two strands of DNA molecules uncoil and separate, and each strand serves as a template for the synthesis of a new strand alongside it.

5. The sequence of bases which should be present in the new strands can be easily predicted because these would be complementary to the bases present in the old strands. A will pair with T, T with A, C with G, and G with C.

6. Thus, two daughter molecules are formed from the parent molecule and these are identical to the parent molecule.

7. Each daughter DNA molecule consists of one old (parent) strand and one new strand.

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 11Continuous and discontinuous synthesis of DNA.

8. Since only one parent strand is conserved in each daughter molecule, this mode of replication is said to be semiconservative.

9. In one strand replication takes place discontinuously and short pieces called Okazaki fragments are synthesized. One strand may synthesize a continuous strand and the other Okazaki fragments. Both new strands are synthesized in the 5’ → 3’ direction. Thus one strand is synthesized forward and the other backward.

10. The Okazaki pieces are joined by polynucleotide ligase, a joining enzyme, to form continuous strands.

Question 26.
Provide experimental evidence for the semi-conservative mode of replication of DNA. (CBSE 2008 (Outside Delhi) 2012, 2016, 2019 C)
Answer:
Meselson and Stahl (1958) experimentally proved that DNA replication is semi-conservative.

  1. E. coli bacterium was grown for many generations in a culture medium in which the nitrogen source contained heavy isotope N15 thus the labeling of bacterial DNA was done.
  2. Later on, these bacteria were cultured in N14 non-radioactive isotope.
  3. DNA was analyzed to determine the distribution of radioactivity.
  4. The experiment showed that one strand of each daughter DNA molecule was radioactive whereas the other was non-radioactive.
  5. During the second replication in the N14 medium, the radioactive and non-radioactive strands separated and served as the template for the synthesis of non-radioactive strands.
  6. Out of four DNA molecules, two are completely non-radioactive and the other two have half of the molecule as non-radioactive.
  7. This evidence shows that DNA replication is semi-conservative.
  8. This biochemical evidence was supported by the direct cytological observation of duplicating DNA of E. coli.

Question 27.
(i) State the ‘Central dogma’ as proposed by Francis Crick. Are there any exceptions to it? Support your answer with a reason and an example.
Answer:
Francis Crick proposed the Central dogma in molecular biology, which states that the genetic information

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 12

Central dogma
In some viruses, central dogma is seen in the reverse direction, that is from RNA to DNA as RNA is the main genetic material. Example: Retrovirus (HIV) and the process is reverse transcription.

(ii) Explain how the biochemical characterization (nature) of the ‘Transforming Principle’ was determined, which was not defined from Griffith’s experiments. (CBSE Delhi 2018)
Answer:
Transforming principle: In 1928, Frederick Griffith, in a series of experiments with Streptococcus pneumonia which is a bacterium responsible for pneumonia, witnessed a miraculous transformation in the bacteria. During the experiment, a living organism (bacteria) changed its physical form. He concluded that the R strain bacteria had somehow been transformed by the heat-killed S strain bacteria.

Some ‘transforming principle’, transferred from the heat-killed S strain, had enabled the R strain to synthesize a smooth polysaccharide coat and become virulent. This must be due to the transfer of the genetic material. However, the biochemical nature of genetic material was not defined from his experiments.

Oswald Avery, Colin MacLeod, and Maclyn McCarty worked to determine the biochemical nature of the ‘transforming principle’ in Griffith’s experiment. They purified biochemicals (proteins, DNA, RNA, etc.) from the heat-killed S cells to see which ones could transform live R cells into S cells. They discovered that DNA alone from S bacteria caused R bacteria to become transformed.

They also discovered that protein-digesting enzymes (proteases) and RNA-digesting enzymes (RNases) did not affect transformation, so the transforming substance was not a protein or RNA. Digestion with DNase did inhibit transformation, suggesting that the DNA caused the transformation. They concluded that DNA is the hereditary material, but not all biologists were convinced.

Question 28.
(a) Write the contributions of the following scientists in deciphering the genetic code: George Gamow; Hargobind Khorana; Marshall Nirenberg; Severo Ochoa.
Answer:
Contributions of scientists:

  1. George Gamow: He suggested that in order to code for all the 20 Amino acids, the code should be made up of three nucleotides. He proved that the codon is a triplet.
  2. Hargobind Khorana: He provided experimental proof that genetic codon is always triplet. He was able to synthesize RNA molecules with a defined combination of bases (homopolymers and copolymers)
  3. Marshall Nirenberg: He prepared a cell-free system for protein synthesis and finally deciphered the genetic code.
  4. Severe Ochoa: He established that enzyme polynucleotide phosphorylase was helpful in RNA synthesis with a defined sequence in a template-independent manner.

(b) State the importance of a Genetic code in protein biosynthesis. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Importance of Genetic code: Genetic code codes for a specific amino acid that is required for protein synthesis. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2018)

Question 29.
Explain translation in detail.
Or
Explain the process of charging tRNA.
Answer:
Translation: During the translation process, proteins are made by the ribosomes on the mRNA strand:
The main steps are:

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 13

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 14

Continuous and discontinuous synthesis of DNA:

  1. Activation of amino acid.
  2. Transfer of activated amino acid to tRNA.
  3. Initiation of synthesis.
  4. Elongation of a polypeptide chain.
  5. Termination of a chain.

Question 30.
Explain the steps involved in DNA fingerprinting. (CBSE 2009)
Answer:
Steps of DNA fingerprinting:
The steps/procedure in DNA fingerprinting include the following:

  1. Extraction: DNA is extracted from the cells in a high-speed, refrigerated centrifuge.
  2. Amplification: Many copies of the extracted DNA are made by a polymerase chain reaction.
  3. Restriction Digestion: DNA is cut into fragments with restriction enzymes into precise reproducible sequences.
  4. Separation of DNA sequences/ restriction fragments: The cut DNA fragments are introduced and passed through an electrophoresis setup containing agarose polymer gel; the separated fragments can be visualized by staining them with a dye that shows fluorescence under ultraviolet radiation.
    Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 15
    Lac operon
  5. Southern Blotting: The separated DNA sequences are transferred onto a nitrocellulose or nylon membrane.
  6. Hybridization: The nylon membrane is immersed in a bath and radioactive probes (DNA segments of known sequence) are added: these probes target a specific nucleotide sequence that is complementary to them.
  7. Autoradiography: The nylon membrane is pressed on an X-ray film and dark bands develop at the probe sites.

Question 31.
What is the inducer in the lac operon? How does it ensure the “switching on” of genes?
(i) Draw a schematic representation of the Lac operon.
Answer:
Inducer. It is a chemical that may be a substrate, hormone, or some other metabolite which after coming in contact with the repressor, changes the latter into the non-DNA binding state so as to free the operator gene. Thus the “switch on” occurs.

(ii) Explain how does this operon gets switched ‘on’ or ‘off’.
Answer:
The expression of the genes is usually controlled to achieve maximum cellular economy. This means that the gene will be turned on or off as per requirement. A set of genes will be switched on when there is the necessity to handle and metabolize a new substrate. When these genes are turned on enzymes are produced, which metabolize the new substrate. The phenomenon is known as induction.

(iii) What is the role of a regulatory gene? (CBSE Delhi 2012, 2019 C)
Answer:
Role of the regulatory gene in a lac operon: It synthesizes a biochemical or regulator protein that can act positively as an activator and negatively as a repressor. It controls the activity of the operator gene.

Question 32.
(i) Describe the structure and function of a tRNA molecule. Why is it referred to as an adapter molecule?
Answer:
t-RNA (transfer RNA) reads the genetic code on one hand and transfers amino acids on the other hand. So it was called adapter molecule by Francis Crick. It is also called soluble RNA (SRNA).

Note: For the figure, please see the answer of Q. no. 11 short answer type question. The secondary structure of tRNA is clover leaf-like but the 3-D structure is inverted L-shaped. t-RNA has five arms or loops:

  • Anticodon loop: It has bases complementary to the code.
  • Amino acid acceptor end: Amino acid binds to it.
  • T-loop: It helps in binding to ribosomes.
  • D-loop: It helps in binding aminoacyl synthetase.
  • Variable loop: Its function is not known.

(ii) Explain the process of splicing of hn-RNA in a eukaryotic cell. (CBSE Delhi 2017)
Answer:
The primary transcript formed in eukaryotes is non-functional, containing both the coding region exon and non-coding region intron in RNA and are called heterogeneous RNA or hn-RNA. hn-RNA undergoes a process where the introns are removed and exons are joined to form mRNA by the process called splicing.

Question 33.
(i) Why does replication occur in small replication forks and not in entire lengths?
Answer:
Replication occurs in a small opening of a DNA helix called replication forks for very long DNA molecules. The reason is in the case of long DNA molecules, the two strands of DNA cannot be separated in their entire length due to very high energy demand.

(ii) Why is DNA replication continuous and discontinuous in a replication fork?
Answer:
DNA-dependent DNA polymerase catalyzes DNA polymerization only in one direction, that is, 5′ → 3′. DNA strands are anti-parallel and have opposite polarity. So on template strand with polarity 3′ → 5′ DNA replication is continuous white on the template strand with polarity 5′ → 3′ replication is discontinuous.

(iii) State the importance of the origin of replication in a replication fork. (CBSE Delhi 2018C)
Answer:
Replication cannot start randomly at any point in DNA. It requires a definite region of sequences where the replication originates. This site is called the origin of replication.

Question 34.
Compare the processes of DNA replication and transcription in prokaryotes. (CBSE Delhi 2019C)
Answer:

Replication Transcription
(i) It is a synthesis of DNA from DNA. (i) It is a synthesis of RNA from DNA.
(ii) Both strands take part in replication. (ii) Only one strand functions as a template.
(iii) It forms double-stranded DNA. (iii) It forms single-stranded RNA.
(iv) RNA primer is essential for initiation. (iv) No primer Is required.
(v) Occurs in the S phase of the cell cycle. (v) Occurs in the G1 and G2 phases of the cell cycle.
(vi) Catalysed by DNA polymerase enzymes. (vi) Catalysed by RNA polymerase enzymes.
(vii) Deoxyribonucteoside triphosphates (dATP, dGTP, dCTP, dTTP) serve as raw materials. (vii) Ribonucleoside triphosphates (ATP, GTP, CTP, UTP) serve as raw materials.
(viii)Involves unwinding and splitting of the entire DNA molecule (chromosome). (viii) Involves unwinding and splitting of only those genes which are to be transcribed.
(ix) Two double-stranded DNA molecules are formed from one DNA molecule. (ix) A single one-strand RNA molecule is formed from a segment of one DNA strand.

Question 35.
Write the different components of a lac operon in E. coil. Explain its expression while in an ‘open’ state. (CBSE Delhi 2017, 2019 C)
Answer:
The Lac operon (Inducible operon): The concept of the operon was first proposed in 1961 by Jacob and Monod.
Components of an operon:

  1. Structural genes: It Is the fragment of DNA that transcribes mRNA for polypeptide synthesis.
  2. Promoter: It Is the sequence of DNA where RNA poLymerase binds and initiates transcription.
  3. Operator: It is the sequence of DNA adjacent to the promoter.
  4. Regulator gene: It is the gene that codes for repressor protein which binds to the operator due to which operon Is switched “off”.
  5. Inducer: Lactose Is an Inducer that helps in switching “on” of an operon. Lac operon consists of three structural genes (z, y, a), operator (o), promoter (p), regulatory gene (r).

(a)Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 16

(b) Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 17

  • Gene z codes for p-galactosidase
  • Gene y codes for permease.
  • Gene codes for enzymes transacetylase. When lactose is absent:

When lactose is absent, i.e. gene produces repressor protein.

This repressor protein binds to the operator and as a result, prevents RNA polymerase to bind to the operon, and the operon is switched off.

When lactose is present:

  • Lactose acts as an inducer that binds to the repressor and forms an inactive repressor.
  • The repressor cannot bind to the operator.
  • Now the RNA polymerase binds to the operator and transcribes lac mRNA.
  • Lac mRNA is polycistronic, i.e. produces all three enzymes p-galactosidase, permease, and transacetylase.
  • The lac operon is switched on.

Question 36.
What is the human genome project (HGP)? Write salient features of the human genome project.
Answer:
Human Genome Project. It is a mega project involving a lot of money, the most advanced techniques, numerous computers, and scientists at work. The magnitude of the project can be imagined that if the cost of sequencing a bp is 3 dollars, sequencing of 3 × 109 bp would be a billion dollars. If the data is to be stored in books, with each book having 1000 pages and each page with 1000 letters, some 3300 books will be required. Here bioinformatics databasing and other high-speed computational devices have helped in the analysis, storage, and retrieval of information.

Salient features of the human genome:

  1. The human genome contains 3164.7 million nucleotides (base pairs).
  2. The size of the genes varies; an average gene consists of 3000 bases, while the largest gene, dystrophin, consists of 2.4 million bases.
  3. The total number of genes is estimated to be 30000 and 99.9% of the nucleotides are the same in humans.
  4. The functions of over 50% of the discovered genes are not known.
  5. Only less than 2% of the genome codes for proteins.
  6. Repetitive segments made up a large portion of the human genome.
  7. Repetitive sequences throw light on chromosome structure and dynamics and evolution, though they are thought to have no direct coding functions.
  8. (Chromosome 1 has 2968 genes and Y-chromosome has the least number (231 genes).
  9. Scientists have identified about 1.4 million locations, where DNA differs in a single base in human beings. These are called single nucleotide polymorphisms (SNPs).
  10. Repeated sequences make up a large portion of the human genome.

Very Important Figures:

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 18Unidirectional repLication

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 19BidirectionaL replication

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 20The flow of genetic information.

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Molecular Basis of Inheritance 21Transcription in eukaryotes

Reproduction in Organisms Class 12 Important Extra Questions Biology Chapter 1

Here we are providing Class 12 Biology Important Extra Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Reproduction in Organisms. Important Questions for Class 12 Biology are the best resource for students which helps in Class 12 board exams.

Class 12 Biology Chapter 1 Important Extra Questions Reproduction in Organisms

Reproduction in Organisms Important Extra Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
What is the life span?
Answer:
The period from birth to natural death of an organism is termed its life span.

Question 2.
Why is reproduction essential for organisms?
Answer:
Reproduction is a process by which an organism produces young ones of its own kind to maintain the continuity of the species. It enables the species to live generation after generation.

Question 3.
What type of modification are ginger, potato, onion and Samarkand?
Answer:
Underground modification of stem.

Question 4.
Name sub-aerial stems which help in multiplication.
Answer:
Pistia, Chrysanthemum Eichhornia, Pineapple.

Question 5.
Name artificial methods of vegetative propagation.
Answer:

  1. Cutting of stem, root and leaf.
  2. Grafting
  3. Layering
  4. Gootee.

Question 6.
Which type of division is involved in asexual reproduction?
Answer:
Only mitotic division occurs during asexual reproduction.

Question 7.
Male honeybee has 16 chromosomes whereas its female has 32 chromosomes. Give one reason. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2016)
Answer:
Male honey bee develops from haploid unfertilised egg (Ovum), whereas female develops from the diploid fertilized zygote.

Question 8.
The diploid number of chromosomes in an angiospermous plant is 16. What will be the number of chromosomes in its endosperm and antipodal cells? (CBSE Outside Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Number of chromosomes in endosperm = 24 (3N)
Number of chromosomes in antipodal cells = 8(N)

Question 9.
Banana is a true fruit and also a parthenocarpic fruit. Justify. (CBSE Foreign 2008)
Answer:
Banana develops from the ovary (true fruit) and develops without fertilisation (parthenocarpic fruit).

Question 10.
Pick out the ancestral line of angiosperms from the list given below: Conifers, seed ferns, cycads, ferns. (CBSE 2008)
Answer:
Seed ferns.

Question 11.
Why is apple referred to as false fruit? (CBSE 2010)
Answer:
In the case of apple, thalamus contributes to fruit formation, while most of the plant’s fruit develops from the ovary.

Question 12.
Name the type of cell division that takes place in the zygote of an organism exhibiting haplontic life cycle. (CBSE 2011)
Answer:
Meiosis

Question 13.
Mention the unique flowering phenomenon exhibited by Strobilanthus Ludhiana (Neelakuranji). (CBSE 2012)
Answer:
It is a monocarpic flowering plant. It flowers once in 12 years.

Question 14.
Some flowers, selected for artificial hybridisation, do not require emasculation but bagging is essential for them. Give a reason. (CBSE Delhi 2019 C)
Answer:
Bagging is the covering of flower by butter paper on polythene. The emasculated flower buds of the female parent and floral buds or male parent are bagged in order to protect them from contamination with unwanted pollen grains.

Question 15.
Cucurbits and papaya plants bear staminate and pistillate flowers. Mention the categories they are put under separately on the basis of the type of flowers they bear. |HOTSj (CBSE 2012)
Answer:
Cucurbits-Monoecious plants Papaya-Dioecious plants.

Question 16.
Why is banana considered a good example of parthenocarpy? (CBSE 2011)
Answer:
It is propagated vegetatively because there is no seed formation.

Question 17.
Name an alga that reproduces asexually through zoospores. Why are these reproductive units called so? (CBSE Outside Delhi 2013)
Answer:

  1. Chlamydomonas
  2. They are called so because they are microscopic motile structures.

Question 18.
Name the phenomenon and one bird where the female gamete directly develops into a new organism. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2013)
Answer:

  1. Parthenogenesis
  2. Turkey bird

Question 19.
Name the vegetative propagules in the following: (CBSE 2014)
(a) Agave
Answer:
Bulbils

(b) Bryophyllum.
Answer:
Leaf bud

Question 20.
Mention a characteristic and a function of zoospores in some algae. (CBSE 2010)
Answer:

  • Zoospores are microscopic and flagellated motile spores.
  • They are reproductive structures.

Reproduction in Organisms Important Extra Questions Short Answer Type

Question 1.
Is there a relationship between the size of an organism and its life span? Give two examples in support of your answer.
Answer:
No, there is no relationship between size and life span of organisms. Large-sized tiger and small-sized dog both live for about 20 years. The very large-sized elephant has a life span of up to 90 years. On the other hand, small-sized tortoise lives for 200 years. Similarly, the mango tree has a much shorter life span as compared to peep at the tree.

Question 2.
Offspring formed due to sexual reproduction have better chances of survival. Why?
Answer:
The offspring formed due to sexual reproduction show variations due to crossing over during gametogenesis, random segregation of gametes or random fertilisation. These useful variations produced in offspring help the organisms to adapt and survive.

Question 3.
How are the progeny formed from asexual reproduction different from those formed by sexual reproduction?
Answer:
The progeny formed from asexual reproduction is genetically similar to the parent, while those formed by sexual reproduction are genetically different from the parents due to new gene combinations formed during crossing over, random segregation and fertilisation.

Question 4.
Mention two inherent characteristics of Amoeba and yeast that enable them to reproduce asexually.
Answer:

  1. Amoeba and yeast are unicellular organisms.
  2. Both have a very simple body structure.
  3. Both reproduce by fission.

Question 5.
Why do we refer to offspring formed by the asexual method of reproduction as clones?
Answer:
Offspring formed by asexual reproduction are called clones because they are morphologically and genetically similar to the parent.

Question 6.
Higher organisms have resorted to sexual reproduction in spite of its complexity. Why?
Answer:
Higher organisms have resorted to sexual reproduction in spite of its complexity because, at the same time, sexual reproduction provides two-fold advantages:

  1. Here genetic recombination, interaction, etc. take place which causes variations in the offspring thus also form raw materials for evolution.
  2. The offspring adapt more comfortably and quickly to the changes in the environmental conditions.

Question 7.
What are gemmules and conidia? Name one organism each in which these are formed. (CBSE Sample Paper 2019, 20)
Answer:
Gemmules: These are internal buds. They consist of a small group of archaeocytes, enclosed by a protective coat. They are formed in freshwater sponges e.g. Spongilla.

Conidia: They are formed in Penicillium. They are non-motile spores produced single or in the chain by a constriction at the tip of special hyphal branches called conidiophores.

Question 8.
Give examples of plants which are propagated vegetatively from underground stems and creeping stems.
Answer:
Underground stems. Mint and Chrysanthemum, Banana, Turmeric, Ginger, Aspidium, Adiantum. Creeping stems. Runners (mint, grass), stolons (strawberry) and offset (Eichhornia).

Question 9.
Differentiate between a zoospore and a zygote.
Answer:
Difference between a zoospore and a zygote:

Zoospore

Zygote

1. It is an asexual spore produced by algae and some fungi and Is capable of moving about by means of flagella. 1. It is a non-mottle cell produced by the certain union of male and female gametes. It Lacks flagella.
2. It Is haploid or diploid in nature. 2. It is diploid in nature.

Question 10.
List the pre-fertilisation events.
Answer:
Pre-fertilisation events. These include all the events of sexual reproduction prior to the fusion of gametes. The two main pre-fertilisation events are gametogenesis and gamete transfer.

Question 11.
Why does the zygote in angiosperms start developing into embryo only after some endosperm is formed?
Answer:
Zygote in angiosperms starts developing into embryo only after some endosperm is formed because endosperm is nutritive in function. It provides nutrients to the zygote for further growth and development.

Question 12.
Why is the offspring formed by asexual reproduction referred to as clone?
Answer:
The offspring formed by asexual reproduction is referred to as clone because the offspring is morphologically and genetically similar to the parent.

Question 13.
Mention the site where syngamy occurs in amphibians and reptiles respectively. (CBSE 2010)
Answer:

  1. In amphibians, syngamy occurs in the external medium, i.e. water.
  2. In reptiles, syngamy occurs in the body of an organism.

Question 14.
Why do internodal segments of sugarcane fail to propagate vegetatively even when they are in contact with damp soil? (HOTS) (CBSE Sample Paper)
Answer:
Sugarcane plants propagate vegetatively only when nodes are in contact with damp soil. Adventitious roots emerge from nodes and not from internodes because nodes bear buds.

Question 15.
Why do algae and fungi shift to a sexual mode of reproduction just before the onset of adverse conditions? (CBSE Delhi 2014, 2015)
Answer:
The organisms produced through asexual reproduction have low adaptability to the changing environment. Thus algae and fungi shift to a sexual mode of reproduction during the onset of adverse conditions.

Question 16.
A moss plant produces a large number of antherozoids but relatively only a few egg cells. Why? (CBSE 2010)
Answer:
In a moss plant, an antheridium produces many sperms while one archegonium produces only one egg cell. That is why there are a large number of antherozoids and a few egg cells.

Question 17.
Mention the reasons for the difference in ploidy of zygote and primary endosperm nucleus in an angiosperm. (CBSE 2010)
Answer:
A zygote is diploid (2n) as one male gamete fuses with egg or oosphere, while primary endosperm nucleus is triploid as one male gamete fuses with a secondary nucleus which is already diploid.

Question 18.
In haploid organisms that undergo sexual reproduction, name the stage when meiosis occurs. Give reasons for your answer.
Answer:
Haploid organisms form gametes without meiosis. Mate and female gametes fuse to form a diploid zygote. Zygote being diploid undergoes meiosis to form haploid organisms e.g. Ulothrix, Chlamydomonas.

Question 19.
Describe the importance of syngamy and meiosis in the life cycle of an organism. (CBSE Delhi 2016)
Answer:
Syngamy is a fusion of haploid gametes. It restores diploid nature in the zygote. Meiosis occurs during gametogenesis, thus produces haploid gametes. Both are important for maintaining chromosome number (ploidy) in an organism.

Question 20.
Angiosperms bearing unisexual flowers are said to be either monoecious or dioecious. Explain with the help of one example each. (CBSE Delhi 2016)
Answer:
In dioecious plants, male flowers termed a staminate flower, and female flowers, termed as pistillate flowers, are borne on different; plants. Thus plants are either male or female.

Examples: Papaya, date palm, etc.
In monoecious plants, male and female flowers are present on the same plants. Example: Maize, coconut, cucurbits, etc.

Question 21.
Write the significance of meiocytes. (CBSE (Delhi) 2016)
Answer:
Significance of meiocytes. Meiocytes are gamete-producing cells which undergo meiosis. They are diploid. As a result of meiosis, they produce haploid gametes. During fertilisation, a fusion of haploid gametes restores diploid nature of zygote. It undergoes mitosis to form complete new young one.

Question 22.
Why do organisms like algae and fungi shift from asexual mode of reproduction to sexual mode? (CBSE Delhi 2018C)
Answer:
During favourable conditions, organisms opt for asexual reproduction but when the conditions are adverse or unfavourable, organisms undergo sexual reproduction.

Question 23.
What is a juvenile phase in organisms? (CBSE Delhi 2018C)
Answer:
It is the stage of growth and attaining maturity in their life before they can reproduce sexually. It is also called the vegetative phase.

Question 24.
(i) State the difference between meiocyte and gamete with respect to chromosome number.
Answer:
Meiocytes are diploid (2n) and gametes are haploid.

(ii) Why is a whiptail lizard referred to as parthenogenetic? (CBSE 2012)
Answer:
Whiptail lizard eggs develop without fertilisation

Reproduction in Organisms Important Extra Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
Define:
(i) juvenile phase,
Answer:
Juvenile phase. The period of growth in the life of organisms before they start reproducing sexually and attain a level of maturity is called juvenile phase. It is followed by the reproductive phase.

(ii) reproductive phase
Answer:
Reproductive phase. The period of active reproductive behaviour, when the organisms show marked morphological and physiological changes is called reproductive phase. It is followed by senescence phase.

(iii) senescence phase.
Answer:
Senescence phase. The period when the reproductive phase ends and concomitant changes occur in the body such as slowing of metabolism is called senescence phase. It is followed by death.

Question 2.
Distinguish between asexual and sexual reproduction. Why is vegetative reproduction also considered as a type of asexual reproduction?
Answer:
1. Differences between asexual reproduction and sexual reproduction.

Asexual Reproduction Sexual Reproduction
1. The process involves only one cell or one parent. 1. This process involves two cells or gametes belonging to either the same or different parents.
2. The whole body of the parent may act as a reproductive unit or it can be a single cell or a bud. 2. The reproductive unit is called gamete which is unicellular and haploid.
3. The offspring are genetically similar to the parent. 3. The offspring differ from the parents.
4. Only mitotic division takes place. 4. Meiosis and mitosis both take place.
5. No formation of sex organs. 5. Formation of sex organs is essential.
6. No evolutionary significance. 6. It introduces variation; hence it is of evolutionary significance.

2. Vegetative reproduction is also considered a type of asexual reproduction because it does not involve meiotic division and there is no formation and fusion of gametes.

Question 3.
How does an encysted Amoeba reproduce on the return of favourable conditions? (CBSE Sample Paper 2019-20)
Answer:
Multiple fission in encysted Amoeba:

  • Amoeba withdraws pseudopodia and secretes a cyst wall around itself. This phenomenon is called encystation.
  • Amoeba divides by multiple fission.
  • It produces a large number of pseudo- conidiospores.
  • The cyst wall breakdown.
  • The spores are liberated and settle down on suitable substrates and grow as amoebae. This process is also called sporulation.

Question 4.
Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of asexual reproduction.
Answer:
Advantages of asexual reproduction:

  1. It involves simple mitotic division in single-parent and it may produce a large number of young ones.
  2. Young ones produced by asexual methods are genetically similar to the parent.
  3. It helps in the dispersal of offspring to far off places.

Disadvantages of asexual reproduction.

  1. The young ones thus produced do not possess much capacity to adapt rapidly to the environmental changes taking place in quick succession.
  2. No genetic recombination occurs; thus no variation occurs.

Question 5.
Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of sexual reproduction.
Answer:
Advantages of sexual reproduction:

  1. Genetic recombination, interaction, etc. take place which causes variations in the offspring, thus also form raw materials for evolution.
  2. The offspring adapt more comfortably and quickly to the change in environmental conditions and have better chances of survival.

Disadvantages of sexual reproduction. Usually, two parents of opposite sexes are required (except in hermaphrodite).

Question 6.
List various methods of natural vegetative propagation. Give examples:
Answer:

  1. Vegetative propagation by stems, e.g.Grasses, Turmeric, Onion, Colocasia, Potato, Gladiolus and Crocus.
  2. Vegetative propagation by roots, e.g. Murraya sp., Albizzia Lebbac, Dalbergia sissoo, Tuberous roots of sweet potato, Asparagus, Tapioca, Dahlia and Yams (Dioscorea).
  3. Vegetative propagation from reproductive organs. Flower buds of century plant (Agave sp.) develop into bulbils.

Question 7.
Define external fertilisation. Mention its disadvantages:
Answer:
The fertilisation in which the fusion of gametes occurs outside the body of the female in an external medium, i.e. water, is called external fertilisation.

Examples. Bony fishes, amphibians, etc. Organisms that exhibit external fertilisation show great synchrony between the sexes in order to liberate the gametes at the same time.

Disadvantages of external fertilisation:

  1. A large number of gametes are produced to ensure fertilisation, thus there is wastage.
  2. The offspring formed are extremely vulnerable to predators, thus threatening their survival up to adulthood.

Question 8.
Explain the process of budding in yeast. (CBSE 2010)
Answer:
Budding in yeast. It is a common type of vegetative reproduction. In a medium which is abundantly supplied with sugar, yeast cytoplasm forms a bud-like outgrowth. The growth soon enlarges and a part of the nucleus protrudes into the bud and breaks off. The bud then begins to grow and then separates from the mother cell. Often it will itself form a bud before it breaks away, and straight or branched chains are produced.
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 1 Reproduction in Organisms 1

Thus, as a result, branched or unbranched chains of cells called pseudo my cilium are produced. The cells are loosely held together. Sooner or later they become independent.

Question 9.
Describe the importance of vegetative propagation.
Answer:
Merits of vegetative propagation:

  1. Plants produced by vegetative propagation are genetically similar and constitute a uniform population called a clone.
  2. Plants with reduced power of sexual reproduction, long dormant period of seed, poor viability, etc. are multiplied by vegetative methods.
  3. Some fruit trees like banana and pineapple do not produce viable seeds. So these are propagated by only vegetative methods.
  4. It is a more rapid and easier method of propagation.
  5. Good characters are preserved by vegetative propagation.
  6. Some plants such as doob grass (Cynodon dactylon) which produce only a small quantity of seed are mostly propagated by vegetative propagation.
  7. Grafting helps in getting an economically important plant having useful characteristics of two different individuals in a short time.

Question 10.
Describe the post-fertilisation changes in a flower.
Answer:
Post-fertilisation changes in a flower.
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 1 Reproduction in Organisms 2

Question 11.
Write a note on sexuality in plants.
Or
Coconut palm is monoecious while date palm is dioecious. Why are they called so?
Answer:
Sexuality in organisms: Sexual reproduction in organisms generally involves the coming together of gametes from two different individuals. But this is not always true.

Sexuality in Plants: Plants may have both male and female reproductive structures in the same plant (bisexual) or on different plants (unisexual). In several fungi and plants, terms such as homothallic and monoecious are used to denote the bisexual condition, and heterothallic and dioecious are used to describe the unisexual condition.

In flowering plants, the unisexual male flower is staminate, i.e. bearing stamens, while the female is pistillate or bearing pistils. In some flowering plants, both male and female flowers may be present on the same individual (monoecious) or on separate individuals (dioecious). Some examples of monoecious plants are cucurbits and coconuts and dioecious plants are papaya and date palm.

Very Important Figures:
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 1 Reproduction in Organisms 3
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 1 Reproduction in Organisms 4